Home

INR-SI47-1909-E_Lift(LM2)_RM(E)

1. 100 gain Analog E Analog Analog input 0 input 11V 10V input 11V 10V OV 10V 11V d 11V OV 10V 11V 10V 11V 4mA 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 20 mA m N 50 gain 60 offset 200 gain and 40 offset 100 100 100 reference _ reference reference point point point 200 200 200 reference reference reference point point point B Filter time constant C33 C38 and C43 These function codes specify the filter time constant for analog input voltage or current on terminals 12 and V2 Increasing the filter time constant delays the response from machinery or equipment and that is the time constant should be specified with considering response speed If the input voltage fluctuates due to noise large filter time constant releases it Data setting range 0 000 to 5 000 s C89 C90 Setpoint factor Numerator via communication Setpoint factor Denominator via communication These function codes specify the ratio for the reference speed pre ramp from communications which contains RS 485 and CAN 2 TE C89 Actual reference speed pre ramp Reference speed pre ramp via communications X m Data setting range 32768 to 32767 For details refer to the descriptions of Chapter 1 Figure 1 1 2 80 2 3 Overview of Function Code 2 3 4 P codes Motor parameters Pi Motor Noofpoles Motor No Motor No of poles ss poles PO1 specifies the number of poles
2. L82 Within L84 L83 Within L84 L82 OverL84 When L80 2 Speed High speed H Creep speed Stop speed Zero speed High speed command Creep speed Zero speed Zero speed nverter command command command command trip Output current No load current x L81 i 0 BRKS P BRKE mmm EN Brake L82 Within L84 L83 Within L84 L82 OverL84 2 162 2 3 Overview of Function Code L85 MC Control Startup delay time z deyo L86 MC Control MC OFF delay time L85 and L86 specify the ON and OFF timings of the MC control signal SW52 2 or SW52 3 SW52 2 is assigned to a general purpose programmable output terminal by setting 12 with E20 to E24 and E27 SW52 3 is assigned by setting 104 with them The MC control signal opens or closes the magnetic contactor connected between the inverter and motor E Startup delay time L85 L85 specifies the delay time from when the MC control signal SW52 2 turns ON until the main circuit output gate turns ON 3002 NOILONNA Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s Note Even if no SW52 2 is assigned to a general purpose programmable output terminal turning a run command ON turns the main circuit output gate ON after the delay time specified by L85 elapses E MC OFF delay time L86 L86 specifies the delay time from when the main circuit output gate turns OFF until the MC control signal SW52 2 turns OFF Data setting range 0 0
3. 9001 Analog 12 terminal input signal 12 9002 Analog C1 terminal input signal V2 C1 function 9003 Analog V2 terminal input signal V2 V2 function E Function 1 Function 2 U04 U05 etc Analog Sets the upper limit and lower limit of operation function block Function Description Reference value Hyst is width YES WE Setting values for the operation of the function block 9990 00 to 0 00 Upper limit to 9990 00 Lowe imi DOT ied with the corresponding function code such as Upper threshold Lower threshold 2 118 2 3 Overview of Function Code Input digital analog Block function code setting Bl Lock selection function 1 function 2 U01 U04 U05 etc digital analog The following items are available as function block Note that if the upper and lower limits are identical there are no upper and lower limits Block selection U01 etc Function block Hold Description Function to hold analog input 1 based on digital input 1 Function 1 U04 etc Upper limit z deyo Function 2 U05 etc Lower limit Inverting adder with enable Function to reverse analog input 1 based on digital input 1 Subtracted value former 3002 NOILONNA Addition value latter Selector 1 Function to select analog input 1 and setting value based on digital input 1 Setting value Not required Selector 2 Function to select setting value
4. C keys the change will immediately take effect however the change is not saved into the inverter s memory To save the change press the key If you press the key without pressing the key to exit the current state then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation Possible Even if the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with e Q iy o keys the change will not take effect Pressing the key will make the change take effect and save it into the inverter s memory Impossible B Copying data The keypad is capable of copying of the function code data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory With this feature you can easily transfer the data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ some code data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copying column of the function code tables given later Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied The function code marked with N is not subject to the Verify operation either If necessary set up uncopied code data manually
5. 55 Leo i Torque bias MEM T 3 t1 Torque command 72 pag inside the inverter Details 1 During the period from the entry of a run command to that of an UNBL command the inverter runs with User controller s torque bias amount 12 2 During the time length L66 from the start of estimation of an unbalanced load the Inverter internal reference torque is equal to Reference torque at the zero speed hold period in inverter position deviation zero control plus User controller s torque bias amount 12 Finally the Inverter internal reference torque becomes equal to Load torque t1 3 When the time length L66 elapses after the start of estimation of an unbalanced load adding the Unbalanced load compensation amount 13 to User controller s torque bias amount 12 produces Torque bias amount c4 At that point t3 tl x2 After that the inverter runs in speed control with the Torque bias amount t4 and under normal ASR operation 4 During the inverter shutdown sequence the inverter decreases a reference torque value held in itself to 0 taking time specified by L56 and then shuts itself down 2 158 2 3 Overview of Function Code L66 Unbalanced load compensation Activation time L56 Torque Bias Reference torque end time L65 Unbalanced Load Compensation Operation L66 specifies the calculation time of unbalanced load
6. Enable digital torque bias Enable PI torque bias Enable DCP torque bias E Torque Bias L54 The torque bias control outputs torque corresponding to load application in advance in order to reduce an impact made when the brake is released A torque bias can be specified for compensation either with analog or digital input Polarity of torque bias and driving braking Torque bias setting setting In the figure shown above when viewed from the motor shaft the counterclockwise rotation means the forward direction and the clockwise rotation the reverse direction The torque bias is a forward direction torque Tto BEN o ren d eT ek a E BB f 585 BTBG i ASH E Reference torque V lx Apuli a Dg Offset Gain Filter Analog torque bias Va command SQ ea A eG e em Torque bias Stratup time CD em EC Torque bias 1 2 TBLTH2 Torque bias Digital 1 TZ TELOR TREO IS S Torque bias Digital 163 TBI ON TE2 0FF 6 o TBI OFF TB2 ON ios ictal 184 TBEONCTBAON Sy s Block Diagram of Torque Bias Generator 2 151 c z O a O z Q Og m Q Analog torque bias L54 0 Setting L54 data to 0 enables torque bias setting
7. Stop speedF25 0 DOT 1 T T l l EN1 amp EN2 a er y y Run command I I I FWD REV rt I 1 Short circuit contact 0 co XM IGBT s gate u EES y y 1201 H67 L56 L86 L120 Figure 1 Standard travel timing sequence with feedback contacts 2 183 As it can be observed as soon as RUN command is ON FWD or REV and EN terminals are active SCC signal is ON Therefore from this moment short circuit contact is opened On the other hand IGBT s drivers cannot be ON until inverter doesn t receive short circuit contacts feedback SCCF By means of this it is avoid that inverter is damaged by itself As soon as SCCF signal is received contact feedback and timer L121 is elapsed inverter can aply voltage at the output as no short circuit is present At stopping SCC is not OFF until IGBT s drivers are OFF and time L86 is elapsed By means of this inverter ensures that when short circuit is applied IGBT s drivers are OFF and brake is closed If brake is closed no regenerated energy can flow from the motor In figure 2 an emergency stop timing sequence is shown Speed High speed 55 0 i e EN1 amp EN2 SSS a Runcommand Safety chain is opened FWD REV SCCF BRKS EE REN scc M9 Short circuit contact amp IGBTs gate merce E33 RE x 3 L120 L82 L86 L120 Figure 2
8. setting 1 i n ss ss2 o ME s M Zero speed High speed Creep speed command Zero speed command command command When you oive the instruction in the creep velocity while accelerating to the high speed Speed S curve is automatically adjusted High speed enm b N E13 Acceleration E12 Acceleration oS deceleration time 6 deceleration time 5 L28 S curve Creep speed N Setting 10 Zero speed L19 S curve Time setting 1 s FWD c EE s iy Zero speed High speed Creep speed Zero speed command command command command 2 174 2 3 Overview of Function Code B Rise direction definition for DCP Bit 4 This bit specifies the relation between FWD REV and Upward Downward for DCP protocol communication L99 bit4 0 FWD Upward REV Downword L99 bit4 1 FWD Downward REV Upward B S1 bit selection for DCP Bit 5 This bit specifies the source of S1 bit from either of SW52 2 and SW52 3 for DCP protocol communication L99 bit5 0 SI bit is the same as the operation of SW52 2 L99 bit5 1 SI bit is the same as the operation of S 52 3 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 E DOPEN function change Bit 6 The function can be switched by L99 bit6 1 When L99 bit6 is 0 After DOPEN is turned ON The state of DOPEN is held until all conditions of BX terminal ON EN terminal OFF DRS terminal OFF and alarm are relea
9. Enable analog multistep speed command with S curve acceleration deceleration In the case of Reference speed pre ramp Stop speed and Reference speed pre ramp lt Starting speed the inverter runs with the reference speed pre ramp of 0 00 r min in closed loop E Multistep speed command with S curve acceleration deceleration L11 to L18 and C04 to C19 The FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters can configure a multistep speed command with sixteen speeds Zero Speed Manual Speed Middle Maintenance Speed Creep Speed Manual Speed Low Low Speed Middle Speed and High Speed 1 through 9 provided for operation purposes To configure the multistep speed command specify L11 to L18 data that combine general purpose input terminal commands 81 SS2 and SS4 with eight reference speeds pre ramp defined by C04 to Cll In the case of using SS8 reference speeds pre ramp are defined by C12 to C19 fixed combinations The setting ranges of the acceleration deceleration times and S curve zones are determined according to the switching of reference speeds pre ramp as described later Combining S57 SS2 and SS4 with reference speeds pre ramp Reference Speed Commands Functio n Code Factory Setting Range Default Description Zelo Speed er Enable the zero speed defined by C04 ch c Z O a O z Q O i m 02 Command Manual Speed Middle Command Maintenance Speed Command
10. Operation completed Push or S ey to quit N this screen Figure 3 11 Screen transition example for copying function code data In Check operation function code data stored in keypad can be check on the screen as below REM S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 5 S F Fundamental 00 0 CHG OK 0 Multi E 1500 00r min Z1 1500 00r min DH 380V Figure 3 12 Checking function code data stored in keypad display sample 3 16 3 4 Programming Mode Bi Overwritten protection for copied data It allows protecting function code data stored in keypad for each memory slots In order to protect data move to the screen for selecting target memory slot at Read operation PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 2 and move cursor to target memory slot that you want to protect Holding down the gt key on the keypad for 5 seconds or more in above situation toggles between protected and un protected state for each memory slots individually S Spd 1450r nmin PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 2 Q KP1 0019LM2 4 KP2 0015LM2 4 co BEES KP3 0006LM2 4 Figure 3 13 Overwritten protected status display sample 3 17 o 9 m S d o zZ c e z E X E r z N B Error messages S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 1 E KP1 0019LM2 4 Canceled S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 1 KP1 0019LM2 4 COM Error S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 1 t KP1 0019LM2 4 Continue
11. pneu ee 0 H Output frequency A J J C03 ipo Sasser eee i i i The inverter stops y rHtomenoshy 0 d Battery power supply BEEN NNNENENENENEEEEEEEEEERMZ 73X pu NE BATRY X c Vvyi 9 Run command fa ON UR f 80 Middle CER BRKS IPL ON 5 i The inverter stops Battery Operation Speed C03 specifies the battery operation speed When the manual speed middle is selected in battery operation the inverter operates with this speed Data setting range 0 00 to 6000 r min LL Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 B Battery operation The battery operation enables an inverter to run the elevator with a battery or UPS in undervoltage condition The purpose of this funtion is to rescues the passengers from the cabin stopped halfway due to a power failure Using battery operation the inverter moves the cabin to the nearest floor 2 73 E Requirements for battery operation 1 2 3 4 BATRY data 63 must be assigned to any digital input terminal A DC voltage or AC voltage in case of using UPS must be supplied from the battery to the main circuit R T or S T The necessary DC voltage level is depending on the operation speed and load Only in the case of using batteries control board has to be supplied additionally Control board
12. 2 1 B Using negative logic for programmable I O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for the general purpose input and output terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to the inverted ON OFF logical value 1 true 0 false state of input or output signal An active ON signal the function takes effect if the terminal is short circuited in the normal logic system is functionally equivalent to active OFF signal the function takes effect if the terminal is opened in the negative logic system An active ON signal can be switched to active OFF signal and vice versa with the function code data setting To set the negative logic system for an I O signal terminal enter data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code For example if the Enable coast to stop command BX data 7 is assigned to any one of digital input terminals X1 to X8 by setting any of function codes E01 through E08 then turning BX on will make the motor coast to a stop Similarly if the BX data 1007 is assigned turning BX off will make the motor coast to a stop B Control mode The FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters supports the following control modes Vector control with PG for asynchronous motor Vector control with PG for synchronous motor Torque vector control without PG for asynchrnonous motor V f
13. 4 The acceleration commanded during a creepless operation will not exceed the specified acceleration Do not change the reference speed pre ramp during a creepless operation After the end of running including the end of operation due to the protective function triggered and a coast to run command received turn the CRPLS command OFF In any of the following cases the creepless operation is forcedly terminated Such a speed pattern that the speed does not reach 0 after the elevator cage moves the specified moving distance Reference speed pre ramp is nonzero Run command is OFF After the forced termination the inverter continues to run with the speed control not involving a creepless operation No protective function trip works No creepless operation takes place until the inverter stops Input timing of a creepless operation command The graph below shows a basic pattern of a creepless operation using the Start creepless operation command CRPLS The CRPLS command should be given within zone A ranging from the end to the start of deceleration The following example shows deceleration from high speed to zero speed The waveforms drawn with broken lines show the speed acceleration and jerk applied when the CRPLS command is given earlier than the ones drawn with full lines Speed L24 S curve L25 S curve r setting 6 setting 7 Theoretical starting point of High speed UU I ES D creepless operation Calcula
14. A Ver collision INV 0300 KP1 0100 KP gt INV 1 Write S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 4 o KP1 0019LM2 4 Rated speed KP1 600 00r min INV 1500 00r min 0 GNMATHUM Note Pressing frg key or a key during each operations cancel the operation and Canceled is shown on the screen and the operation is terminated forcibly In the case of Read operation the data stored in the selected memory slot is cleared if cancelled If a communication error occurs between keypad and inverter during each operations the error screen will be displayed Try again after checking connections between keypad and inverter The function codes stored in the keypad are not compatible with the inverter function codes Version upgrades may be non standard or incompatible Please contact us It can be continued by pressing 2 key In this case it might cause problems because the operation is processed forcibly Only Verify operation If there is a mismatch in the function code data between inverter and keypad the mismatched function code data is displayed on the screen and verification stops temporally Pressing key again continues verification with the next function code data If an error screen is displayed press the amp 9 key or the key to release After resetting the screen returns to programming mode 3 18 3 4 Programming Mode 3 4 3 5 Initialize function code data Ini
15. Cancel Enable Enable Default 0 0 0 0 E Fixation of the carrier frequency Bit 0 It is available to fix carrier frequency to 16 kHz at all of speed range in order to reduce driving noise LL Refer to the descriptions of function codes F26 E Masked parameters depending on set control mode Bit 1 It is available to mask unused function codes according to each control mode E Ground fail detection cancel Bit 6 E Short detection cancel Bit 7 These bits are not necessary to be changed normally 2 192 L201 L202 L203 L205 L209 LO 2 3 Overview of Function Code Pulse output OPC PR PS PSH AB pulse output rate Pulse output OPC PR PS PSH AB pulse output order Pulse output OPC PR PS PSH Z pulse output Pulse output OPC PR PS PSH AB pulse output hysteresis Pulse output OPC PR PS PSH Number of ST bits For details refer to the instruction manual of the corresponding option card 2 193 z deyo S3QO09 NOILONNA 2 3 9 K codes Keypad functions LCD monitor Language selection K01 specifies the language to display on the multi function keypad as follows Data for E46 Language Japanese English ote If the langue for touch panel which connect with inverter is not belong to above range Note English will be indicated LCD monitor Backlight off time K02 specifies the backlight OFF time of the LCD on the ke
16. Figure 8 shows the case when brake is controlled by external means This is detected because BRKS signal is not ON but BRKE feedback signal is received This basically means that somebody opened the brake by external means In this case short circuit will be applied as well in order to avoid that motor accelerates fast as brake will be opened 2 186 2 3 Overview of Function Code Run command FWD REV BRKS OFF ALM L84 x Inverter trips Er6 SUB 8 S3QO09 NOILONNA Figure 8 Brake opened by external means Case 4 STBY input function is ON Figure 9 shows the case when stand by mode function STBY is enabled In this case energy will be saved by not keeping energized motor short circuit contacts rt Run command off N NH FWD REV sccr WENZNM NINF STBY F E pending T m BRKS OFF Ri scc EN Short circuit contact WEESIZETNMM CLOSED IGBT s gate OFF N ALM OFF Figure 9 STBY function enabled L125 UPS batteries minimum operation level Minimum battery operation level can be defined in this function code If batteries or UPS are not supplying enough voltage on the DC link to perform battery operation inverter will be locked by LV alarm By means of this level battery operation is aborted if DC link voltage is not enough to perform battery operation If voltage en DC link is over L125 level rescue operation can be performed is allowe
17. Name Material No Description Acceptance inspection mounting amp wiring of the d inverter operation using the keypad running the Insiden Manual Le motor for a test troubleshooting and maintenance and inspection The materials are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use How this manual is organized This manual contains Chapters 1 2 and 3 Chapter 1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters Chapter 2 FUNCTION CODES This chapter contains overview lists of nine groups of function codes available for the FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters and details of each function code Chapter 3 OPERATION USING TP A1 LM2 This chapter describes how to operate FRENIC Lift LM2 using with optional multi function keypad TP A1 LM2 Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual Note This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents Tip This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations m This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information CONTENTS Chapter 1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC 1 1 Symbols Used inside the Block
18. This setting is same as function code K01 Available languages might change according to software version of TP A1 LM2 3 4 2 2 Select application App Select PRG gt 1 gt 2 gt fix Allows individual initialization of function codes that are grouped by application This setting is same as function code H03 LL Refer to 0 Data Initialization for details o U m S d o z c eui z O E m x r z x 3 4 2 3 Display settings Disp Setting PRG 1 3 51 5 SBto PRG 1535 13 KRA Allows setting the keypad display content and behavior Follow the settings below to display output frequency current torque and other necessary information on the keypad s main monitor and sub monitors Table 3 8 Items available in display settings Function M Functi Sub Menu unctions Code Selects sub monitor display numerical display bar graph GIAREN A A Speed Speed Screen selection 14 50 IJ in 14 50 r fin RUN f Spd lout 18 00A lot BP PWR 7 23 kW PWR GO ProgramMenufg GO ProgramMenufg Main monitor Set main monitor display item Select speed monitor Set speed monitor item that corresponding to E43 0 Sub monitor 1 Set sub monitor 1 display item sub monitor 2 Set sub monitor 2 display item Bar graph 1 Set bar graph 1 display item Bar graph 2 Set bar graph 2 display item Bar graph 3 Set bar graph 3 display item Backlight OFF time Set backlight bl
19. y on Drive continuance ON alarm i ALM2 Driving signal p r RUN Driving Less than 10 goconds Drive Inyerter Driving continuanc Stop operation 2 170 2 3 Overview of Function Code B ENOFF signal output mode Bit 3 E Calculate ASR with only speed command during ULC Bit 4 B FAN ON OFF during battery operation Bit 6 These bits are not necessary to be changed normally L99 Control switch P06 motor unload current L56 torque bias torque reference finish timer L57 torque bias limit L80 brake control operation selection x c Z O a O z Q Og m Q Selecting corresponding operations of inverter Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Initial torque i Current Magneti bias and PAN confirmation ole reference P9 for S curve position synchronous t control FR offset na decreasin motor driving Short floor ti Not DOPEN Slbit Rise Ese m Function function selection direction 8 assigned change for DCP definition g Data 0 Disable SW52 2 Disable Disable Disable Disable Data 1 Enable SW52 3 Enable Enable Enable Enable Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 E Current confirmation for synchronous motor Bit 0 In case of controlling synchronous motor the output current is proportional to the output torque Therefore the output current is 0 before releasing the brake theoretically In this case even if the output phase is
20. 0 ex Pon E B a ISSN 885 ALM i a nf o Depend on output current E 1 Max 10ms Max 10ms gt t 2 63 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 E Input power limitation IPL Function code data 112 At the battery operation when the input power has exceeded the level specified C01 and the input power continues longer than the period specified by C02 Limit time the inverter stops automatically and ZPL comes ON It turns OFF when FWD or REV command turns OFF For details refer to the descriptions of function codes C01 to C02 E MC control 2 SW52 3 Function code data 114 This output signal is used for MC control This signal is a logical sum OR gate of SW52 2 MC control and AX2 Run command activated Compared with SW52 2 even if EN terminal is OFF or BX terminal is ON SW52 3 comes ON and MC can be turned ON as soon as run command is ON For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L85 and L86 MC Control E Pole tuning done PTD Function code data 115 Pole tuning done with reference to Z signal PTD Z Function code data 126 If the Pole tuning is not done the signal is OFF therefore the drive is informing to the external equipment that Pole tuning must be performed If pole tuning is performed PTD signal is set to ON when the tuning has been finished without errors After that when detecting a Z phase pulse or si
21. I Rated current of the motor A Data setting range 0 00 to 50 00 96 B X P08 Enter the value calculated by the following formula X14 X2x XM X2 XM Cable X V 3x1 Xl Primary leakage reactance of the motor Q X x 100 X2 Secondary leakage reactance of the motor converted to primary Q XM Exciting reactance of the motor Q Cable X Reactance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V I Rated current of the motor A Data setting range 0 00 to 50 00 96 CNote For reactance choose the value at the base speed F04 2 83 c c Z O a O Z Q i m Qo Motor Slip comp driving gain Motor Slip comp braking gain P09 and P10 specify the slip compensation gain in percentage to the rated slip P12 at the driving and braking sides respectively Data setting range P09 P10 0 0 to 200 0 96 Motor Slip comp response time Determines the response time for slip compensation Basically there is no need to modify the default setting Data setting range 0 05 to 1 00 s Note Itis a special code of the torque vector control Refer to page 2 2 for the control mode of the inverter Motor Rated slip P12 specifies the rated slip frequency of the motor Data setting range 0 00 to 15 00 Hz The rated slip frequency is calculated with the following formula Rated slip frequency Hz Rated frequency Hz x Synchronous speed r min
22. Usg Customizable logic output signal 6 Ifa step output is analog 3 is Lc a Oo on oe ecl 8001 Speed command Ug Customizable logic output signal 7 Not reversible operation by polarity 1 o0 NS Enriction selection io SUE Spee comand U88 Customizable logic output signal 8 Reversible operation by polarity Function selection 8004 orque bias command 100 oq Customizable logic output signal9 fo us U89 Function selection 100 a Customizable logic output signal 10 us U90 Function selection 100 2 124 2 3 Overview of Function Code B Specific function codes The following function codes can take values on memory by using the customizable logic Function code switch 6003 Overwritten values are cleared with power off Function codes Name F07 Acceleration deceleration time 1 F08 Acceleration deceleration time 2 F21 DC braking 1 Braking level F22 DC braking 1 Braking time F23 Starting frequency 1 F24 Starting frequency 1 Holding time F25 Stop frequency F44 Current limiter Level ch c Z O a O Z Q Og m Qo E10 Acceleration deceleration time 3 Ell Acceleration deceleration time 4 E12 Acceleration deceleration time 5 E13 Acceleration deceleration time 6 E14 Acceleration deceleration time 7 E15 Acceleration deceleration time 8 E16 Acceleration deceleration time 9 E17 Acceleration deceler
23. a o UD Customizable logic output signal 2 2 Output of step 2 S0002 Output selection Em 0 U73 COMPE ON output signal 3 199 Output of step 199 SO199 0 Maccopum d e Lue Satie ee ak Poo ere a te nena 200 Output of step 200 S0200 ne U74 Customizable logic output signal 4 Output selection 0 ins Customizable logic output signal 5 J 4 Output selection 0 U76 Customizablelogicoutputsignal o RN Output selection 0 Un Customizablelogicoutputsignal 7 fT Output selection 0 7g Customizable logic output signal 8 a I Qu nd Output selection 0 UT9 Customizablelogicoutputsignal 0000000 4 Output selection 0 uso Customizable logic output signal 10 HEN S aa Output selection 0 ER maur HE signal 1 W Ifa step output is digital 100 Teustomizable logic output signal 2 The same value as E98 can be specified RERUADETOERYIS U82 Function scies put Sig 0 1000 Select multistep speed 1 0 to 1 steps SS1 100 Customizable logic output signal 3 CTUM 1 1001 Select multistep speed 1 0 to 3 steps SS2 REESE MES QU il Geactonecieciony m 2 1002 Select multistep speed 1 0 to 7 steps SS4 100 Petipa Store ca MEDIE EE 3 1003 Select multist d 1 0 to 15 steps SS8 U84 Customizable logic output signal 4 Aper aaa EPER eal Function selection 100 p vu Gustomizatle logic outputsignals 8 PF us U85 Function selection 100
24. external means SHd09 NOILONNA Case 4 STBY input function is ON In this case energy will be saved by not keeping energized motor short circuit contacts In other words function SCC will remain ON no short circuit always except in above mentioned cases In case of blackout L86 delay time cannot be warrantied In order to avoid early contact closing it is recommended to use a normally closed contact with programmable delay at Tip closing In this case in order to avoid extra delays L86 can be set to 0 00s In case of contactorless L85 timer is not necessary in this case please set L85 0 00s E Short circuit control Check time L121 This is the time that inverter will wait to receive short circuit contact feedback In case of using SCC function to have short circuit contact feedback SCCF input function is a must L121 function code must be set to a time longer than short circuit contact reaction time If L121 time elapses and no feedback is received SCCF remains OFF inverter will be blocked by alarm SCA This timer is only valid when output function SCC is used In below figures different time charts show the behavior of SCC and SCCF functions depending on the setting of function code L120 In case that L120 0 default setting SCC will turn ON and OFF each travel according to below situations shown in each figure In figure 1 a standard travel timing sequence is shown Speed High speed Creep speed
25. 1 User Configuration User Config From programming mode menu number 5 User Config function codes can be added to or deleted from the Quick Setup Target function codes can be added or deleted by selecting them 3 28 3 4 Programming Mode 3 4 7 Tools PRG 6 3 4 7 1 Monitor Customizable Logic CLogic Monitor PRG gt 6 gt 1 Customizable logic can be previewed graphically in each function block Step and S Spd 1450r min block function PRG 6 1 1 200 Step001 2003 Ancillary information Input value MAX 100 In this case these show minimum maximum limiter signal name and Input type Output value Digital signal Analog signal Block function image Figure 3 19 Customizable logic monitor display sample 3 4 7 2 Load Factor Measurement Load Factor This function enables measurement of the maximum output current average output current and average braking power Measurement modes are indicated in the table below Mode for measuring for a fixed period of Mode for setting a measurement period and taking measurements for time a set period of time Mode for measuring from run to stop Mode for taking measurements from the beginning to the end ofa run If in the mode to measure the interval from run to stop entering this mode while running will take measurements during the period until stopping If entering this mode while stopped measurements will be taken fr
26. 3 27 3 4 6 3 4 6 1 S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 4 gt 1 0 oc3 1 Er5 2 LV S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 4 gt 1 gt 0C3 1 9 Over Current At Set Speed Main OC3 0000 O lap1 OV3 O lap2 GO Operat Mode 0001 S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 4 gt 1 gt 0C3 4 9 gt Time 12 hours EneN 0 11x10000 Edc 566v T Int 40 C T Fin 43 C Power 0 02 kw GO Operat Mode PRG gt 4 gt 1 gt 0C3 7 9 2 Di Ora x L xe Meni LlnEvim x2 L x7 Im EN2 x3 x8 Lx 0x5 181CH GO Operat Mode S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 4 gt 1 gt 0C3 2 9 o gt Fref 48 33 Hz Fout1 0 00 Hz Speed 0 01uz Iout 0 004 Vout 0v PP Ofs 122 34deg GO Operat Mode PRG gt 4 gt 1 gt 0C3 5 9 Status INT IM PG IM LITratimit m PG Hz LlLowvolt Lom GO Operat Mode PRG gt 4 gt 1 gt 0C3 8 9 gt gt Di Link L rwo Ox Axs L xr L nevL x2 x7 QXR Lyx3 Axs RST 0x4 0x5 0000H A GD Operat Mode e S Spd 1450r min PRG 4 1 0 0C3 1 9 gt Over Current Shock load Excessive load Short circuit Ground fault GO Operat Mode PRG gt 4 gt 1 gt 0C3 3 9 D Torque 0 TRQC 0 TRQI 0 GO Operat Mode PRG gt 4 gt 1 gt 0 0C3 6 9 D Status2 CFAR LIFE FDT m RDY E fio Zer 1102 GO Operat Mode PRG gt 4 gt 1 gt 0 0C3 9 9 Do L vi L seasc LIv2 L1v3A Llv4A Oysa A Gi Operat Mode Figure 3 18 Screen transition for Alarm History display sample PRG gt 5 Quick setup PRG 5
27. Aouanbauy joue eDejo Ulioxa snq Jull Od punos 100 SPROUL ouo queino peor oN 90d Jo3uo2 uej Buijoog Jeng du L my Al np juauno jndjno Joyesedwog 90 01 LOO Uuuelv 90H JO U00 uej Buljoo9 my Aq n juauno jndjno yoegpess Od jeu amp is WMd oseud o Jojoedeo snq xui Od Jeymoes 9oJnos Jepooua JoMOd esind JOJON Figure 1 3 Block Diagram of Drive Command Controller 1 4 Chapter 2 FUNCTION CODES This chapter contains overview lists of nine groups of function codes available for the FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters and details of each function code Contents 2 1 Function Code Tables imde n e pede cd e ect 2 1 2 2 Before setting the function Code s ee ese RU RR M D ER REUS EE 2 22 2 3 Overview of Function Codes nn ie m e e C TCU Re Pe e oU e EL lg Ep a pde 2 23 2 3 1 F codes Fundamental functions esses eene enne nnns 2 24 2 3 2 E codes Extension terminal functions nennen enne ener ener 2 49 2 3 3 C c des Control functions eet ee ue ae REI STR RTI A RUE RES 2 73 2 3 4 P codes Motor parameters sese eet e de rere a 2 81 2 3 5 H codes High performance functions sse enne 2 85 2 3 6 U codes Customizable logic operation nennen eene enne 2 104 2 3 T y codes Tank functions e ee Sedet ete oett ews GELS eae 2 129 2 3 8 AL codes Lift functions ederent ROO OUO Innes 2 136 23 9
28. Change Data Torque Software P A Data Default i Code Data setting range Increment Unit when i format vector version which j copying setting running No control can be used U02 Customizable logic Step 1 Digital m dp RA oes o ne E U03 Input 1 0 to 129 Same as E20 value N X 100 1 b Input 2 However 27 141 to 150 cannot be selected 2001 to 2200 3001 to 3200 Output of Step 1 to 200 4001 5001 X1 terminal input signal 4002 5002 X2 terminal input signal 4003 5003 X3 terminal input signal 4004 5004 X4 terminal input signal 4005 5005 X5 terminal input signal 4006 5006 X6 terminal input signal 4007 5007 X7 terminal input signal 4008 5008 X8 terminal input signal 4010 5010 FWD terminal input signal 4011 5011 REV Terminal input signal 6000 7000 Final run command RUN FL RUN 6001 7001 Final run command FWD FL FWD 6002 7002 Final run command REV L REV 6007 7007 With without alarm factor ALM ACT Inside the is the negative logic signal OFF at short circuit Analog 8000 Reference speed Final 8001 Primary frequency 8002 Output current 8003 Output voltage 8004 Output torque 8008 Actual speed estimated speed 8009 DC link bus voltage 8018 Inverter heat sink temperature 8019 Inverter intemal temperature 9001 Analog 12 terminal input signal 9002 Analog C1 terminal input signal 9003 Analog V2 terminal input signal ee po 3 c
29. Creep Speed Command Manual Speed Low Command Low Speed Command Middle Speed Command High Speed 1 Command 00000000 to 00000111 combining with the states of terminal commands 51 52 and SS4 00000001 Enable the manual speed middle defined by C05 combining with the states of terminal commands S1 SS2 and 4 00000010 Enable the maintenance speed defined by C06 combining with the states of terminal commands 1 52 and SS4 00000011 Enable the creep speed defined by C07 combining with the states of terminal commands 51 52 and SS4 00000100 Enable the manual speed low defined by C08 combining with the states of terminal commands 1 52 and SS4 00000101 Enable the low speed defined by C09 combining with the states of terminal commands 51 52 and SS4 00000110 Enable the middle speed defined by C10 combining with the states of terminal commands 51 52 and SS4 00000111 2 25 Enable the high speed defined by C11 combining with the states of terminal commands 51 SS2 and SS4 Definition of Setting Value for L11 to L18 000001 1 1 0 Inactive 1 Active L SP noH EN Active logic Negative logic SS2 0 OFF 1 ON Terminal ON 1 Terminal ON 0 SS4 0 OFF 1 0N Terminal OFF 0 Terminal OFF 1 Factory default combination of SS7 SS2 S S4 and SS8 states with reference speeds pre ram Css ss se
30. Data Default R Code Data setting range Increment Unit when s vector version which M copying setting running control can be used y01 RS485 Communication 1 Station address 1 to 255 yo2 Communications error 0 Immediately trip with alarm 7 processing Trip with alarm 4 after running for the period specified by timer y03 Retry during the period specified by timer y03 If retry fails trip with alam 4 If it succeeds continue to run 3 Continue to run y04 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps y05 Data length 0 8bits 1 7 bits y06 Parity check 0 None Stop bit 2 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity 3 None Stop bit 1 y07 Stop bits 0 2bits Y 1 NG a T y08 No responso s error OFF 0 No detection P NNNM ENIM y10 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol 1 SX protocol FRENIC Loader protocol 2 Reserved for particular manufacturers 5 DCP3 y11 RS485 Communication 2 Station address 1 to 255 y12 Communications error 0 Immediately trip with alam 7 processing Trip with alarm Z after running for the period specified by timer y03 Retry during the period specified by timer y03 If retry fails trip with alam 4 If it succeeds continue to run 3 Continue to run c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 y14 Baud rate 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps y15 Data length y16 Parity check 0 None Stop bit 2 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity 3 No
31. E99 assigns a BRKE signal to that terminal This signal is used to confirm whether the actual brake works normally with the BRKS signal issued from the inverter Configure an external circuit that turns the signal ON or OFF when the brake is actually released or applied respectively If the output status of the BRKS signal is not identical with the input status of the BRKE signal the inverter trips with alarm Er6 If there is a time lag between the status change of the BRKS signal and the entry of the BRKE signal specify the lag time with L84 Brake check timer During the lag time set by L84 after the BRKS signal or BRKE signal status changes even if there is a difference between the output status of the BRKS signal and input status of the BRKE signal the inverter does not trip Note that the time lag function does not work unless BRKS or BRKE is specified Make sure that the total time of the brake check time L84 and the OFF delay time L83 is less than the stop speed holding time H67 2 161 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA Brake control timing schemes Given below are brake control timing schemes to be applied when the L80 1 and 2 When L80 1 Speed High speed Creep speed Stop speed SS4 IEEE NNNNNNEEEEENI Zero speed High speed command Creep speed Zer speed Zero speed inverter trip command command command command BRKS ee d BRKE 5 Brake
32. OL 0 eum osp ooy 40399 os euin 09p o9e n uone4edo 400 j 340uS peeds po3ey 04 pow pegs peeds Q usv O Y Gm leuy paads 9u 4 4 4 J9 o1uo0 duiey NUR 40 3ue3suoo euin 40 uo Buipuede 10H 120 uo Bupuedeg GEND ee C peoe ons GED uie8 paeM40j pee YSY leuy paads oouc19JoM 0430 100 OEM zH 100 EOM uiu peeds dois eum YeIs YOS GH 6ZIN eum o43uo9 peeds 0497 sblh Ga peeds Surueqs ea peeds Sunueds Figure 1 2 Block Diagram of Reference Torque Command Generator 1 3 1 4 Drive Command Controller eun Je peeds Tanaan GD juejsuoo q YdV GD juejsuoo d Ydy 71 juejsuoo YSV Ga juejsuoo d YSV 9 euin uoneAgov 99 uonnjoses Gor uogosjes 101 Jepooue esind serq enbJo eoue19Jes sejod jo oN 10104 104 oum dnyeys seiq enbjo dis pee ra uef Buppeuq duioo dijs oia ure Hurup duos diis Goa 91M uonisod peeds pejosjeq EETA Jojoojep peeds xoeqpesj Od peeds pej ejeq erau peo1 GD euin je16 u st ueo Gr uoisioep Joyejnojeo diis dois yous Bumes uonejedo epoui joquooS Jojejnojeo jourew Js w pua JeAjesqo P ondeloud E suing Pusuno E puewwoo uoisseJddns enbJo eoueJejes T i onbio enbio UOHeIqIA J9 J8AU09 Con ueb d YOV eseud erz mm 911 9 1n Buunp ure d ov Jojejnojeo ONI P eano d peeds pejoejeg
33. S0200 to be connected to customizable logic output signals 1 to 10 CLO1 to CLO10 To specify a general purpose digital output function on Y terminals to which one of the customizable logic output signals 1 to 10 CLO1 to CLO10 is to be connected select one of CLO1 to CLO10 by specifying the general purpose digital output function on any Y terminal E20 E21 E27 General purpose analog output FMA terminals Select one of the internal step output signals 0001 to S0200 to be connected to customizable logic output signals 1 to 10 CLO1 to CLO10 To specify a general purpose analog output function loa TEM Ze to which jos of the customizable logic output signals 1 to 10 CLO1 to CLO10 is to be connected select one of CLO1 to CLO10 by specifying the general purpose digital output function on any FM terminal U71 to U80 Note General purpose digital outputs on Y terminals are updated every 5 ms To securely output a customizable logic signal via Y terminals include on or off delay timers in the customizable logic Otherwise short ON or OFF signals may not be reflected on those terminals 2 123 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA d Name Data setting range ny Un Customizable logic output signal 1 0 Disable 0 _______ Output selection 1 Output of step 1 80001
34. final reaches the speed pre ram The table below lists the acceleration deceleration times to be applied when the reference speed pre ramp is changed after the reference speed final reaches the previously commanded reference speed pre ramp Those times are specified by function codes F07 F08 and E10 to E17 In the table below Stop refers to a run command being off F07 F08 indicates that F07 and F08 apply during acceleration and deceleration respectively Sto Zero i Maintenance Creep Low Middle p speed ESS speed speed speed speed middle LT EERENESENENESENEN Zero speed Zero speed Fo7 Fos FOT FOS Mantal ar F07 F08 FO7 FO8 F07 F08 F07 F08 FO7 FO8 F07 F08 middle emjee F07 F08 F07 F08 F07 F08 F07 F08 F07 F08 FOT7 FO8 F07 F08 Creep speed speed Fo7 ros FOTOS FO7 FOS FOT FOS Fo7 Fo8 FO7 FOS FO7 FOS ae speed ES F07 F08 F07 F08 SoS FO7 FO8 FO7 FO8 FO7 FO8 F07 F08 How speed How speed Fo7 Fo8 FOTOS FOT FOS FO7 F08 FOT FOS FO7 FOS Middle speed EE EH EE RI E EH High d O When the speed is changed to high speed 1 to 9 from the other of high speed E12 is used S curve starting ending zones to be applied when the reference speed pre ramp is changed after the reference speed final reaches the speed pre ram The table below lists the S curve starting ending zones to be applied when the reference speed
35. its detection method and its holding time respectively to reduce an impact to the load at the end of travel E Stop speed F25 F25 has diferent behaviors depending on the control mode In case of Torque vector control it is stop speed in other words at deceleration to stop motor will keep running at F25 speed as long as run command is ON In case of Vector control with PG it is just a speed level in other words motor will decelerate to 0 00 rpm at stop even F25 is different than 0 00 rpm Data setting range 0 00 to 150 0 r min LL Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 E Detection method H66 H66 selects whether to use the detected speed or reference speed final for detecting the stop speed Data for H66 Function Use detected speed Use reference speed final n case of Torque vector control inverter will use reference speed final as well E Holding time H67 H67 specifies the time that inverter will keep main output circuit ON after stop speed F25 level is reached even run command is removed before If H67 is 0 00 s and run command is removed before stop speed F25 level is reached inverter will switch OFF main output circuit as soon as F25 level is reached Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s In case of Vector control with PG Detected speed or Stop speed Torque Bias Reference referen
36. m 02 This function is not available under Torque Vector control This function detects the load inside the car during zero speed at starting E Load cell function Overload mode selection L143 Load cell function can operate in a different ways when Overload LCO level is detected Data for L143 Action 0 When overload is detected according to setting on L144 and L147 LCO output function is activated Inverter doesn t stop operation It Deffault setting is a decision of the controller to stop or not the lift When overload is detected according to setting on L144 and L147 LCO ouput function is activated After closing the brake inverter stops and trips LCo E Load cell function Timer L144 In order to detect torque at zero speed brake has to be opened and some time is needed to stabilize motor s current This time is difined in L144 function code LL Refer to the descriptions of function codes L199 bit0 E Load cell function LC1 detection level L145 Torque level set on this parameter will be understood as torque needed to keep zero speed when one person is inside the car or a certain level of load In order to set L145 correctly please check torque at zero speed when one person is inside car or certain amount of load that wants to be detected after rollback is compensated 2 189 Speed 4 mm s Torque 9 A L145 Mechanical brake LC1 OO OO XXX
37. ocu 6 V rem 100 W mi serq enb4o3 eoueJejey x seq enb4o3 eoueJejey qeu seiq onbJo Jo3u09 dooj uedo Buunp anbio pejejnajeo MOYS ZOM PUP ZON x Gam Com 0 0 Con enb4o3 99u949J9M4 9nbJoj eoueJ9Jey PM O Ei i Q c O c O Oo o gt oO o Q c o i 29 Q ac i q ros HeT l 70 uonounyj yul 4peo1 uoneaedo xui suoneoiunuiuoo sis Jepeo OIN334 GD NVO GS c Mod S8 SM Gs uod S87SY serq enbao CAL 11 pueuuoo seiq enb4o3 jeysiq xeu xx x seig enb4o3 Sojeuy amp 8I H 31 seq enbuoip oH NYO 40 Ggpsu er yun Suoneoiunuiuoo ejqeu3 suwu 100 GEIM zH 100 QUM uiuyw 0 0 OIM uua L0 0 80M GST pow jouoo ues g peeds 3uiuo3iS 40399 os uong4edo 3unaejs eum Pesos peeds Sunueds sou peeds BulyoyMs peeds Mo 3e 3ue3suoo CD peeds Mo 3e que1suoo d ET eun BuIpjoy peeds Sunueqs 24 peeds Sunueys 23 peeds ysiy 3e que1suoo q usv J01e49uo8 9nb4o3 3unue3s pow pes enbao EPON seq nbdo equ seiq onbJo peeds pe1oe1eq peeds pe3oejep 104 ueuiuoo peeds dejsnn 3ue3suo09 euin 497 14 P pi FIUNN pI 01 BURAS eAno s s w 10 0 ELM LZ9 uo Buipuedeg Gem 0410 100 Gem ununu Lo o BLM uw Loro QIM zH 100 COM uw C amp W duieJ eud peeds sousiajey
38. pre ramp is changed after the reference speed final reaches the speed pre ramp They are specified by function codes L19 to L28 and H57 to H60 In the table below for example L19 L22 indicates that L19 and L22 apply at the starting and ending Zones respectively When two different creep speeds are applied set the low speed for the higher creep one Manual Maintenance Low Middle speed speed speed speed middle Io o f H57 H58 H57 H58 H57 H58 H57 H58 H57 H58 H57 H58 H57 H58 H59 Zero speed Hic L19 L22 H57 H58 L19 L20 L19 L20 L19 L22 LI9 L24 Manual speed H59 og zs Jf L23 L26 H59 H60 H59 H60 H59 H60 H59 H60 middle H60 speed Creep speed a H57 H58 H57 H58 H57 H58 H57 H58 H57 H58 low H60 Tip In the condition of EN OFF or BX ON it is judged as Stop command 2 28 2 3 Overview of Function Code When the reference speed pre ramp is changed before the reference speed final reaches that speed pre ramp during acceleration deceleration The inverter immediately aims at the newly changed reference speed pre ramp applying the acceleration deceleration times and S curve acceleration deceleration zones defined on the previous page just as when the reference speed pre ramp is changed after the reference speed final reaches the previously commanded reference speed pre ramp The differences between operations before and after the reference speed final reaches th
39. the discharging time cannot be accurately measured and as a result it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached To avoid such an error you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor z deyo Load may vary significantly in the following cases Disable the judgment on the life during operation and either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the actual use conditions e Auxiliary input for control power is used 3002 NOILONNA An option card is used Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to the terminals of the DC link bus For details refer to the FRENIC Lift LM2 Instruction Manual INR SIA7 1894 E Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION B Braking transistor error detection Bit 6 Upon detection of a built in braking transistor error this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm dbA Set data of this bit to 0 when the inverter does not use a braking transistor and there is no need of entering an alarm state E Canceling detection of thermistor cut line Bit 7 400V series 37kW and above For the inverter 400V series 37kW and above the connection between the thermistor for detecting fan s temperature and detecting circuit of power print board is considered as a harness When the connection is cut it is possible that choos
40. 1 2 based on digital input 1 Setting value 1 Setting value 2 LPF Low pass filter with enable Value of an analog input 1 is filtered through LPF time constant U04 when the digital input 1 is 1 When the digital input 1 is 0 the analog input 1 is directly output LPF maintains the previous output value Therefore when the digital 1 input changes from 0 to 1 the output will be the value with the previous output value added as the initial value of LPF No upper lower limiter Time constant 0 No filter 0 01 to 5 00s Fixed as 0 Rate limiter with enable Value of an analog input is limited with change rate specified in functions 1 and 2 when the digital input 1 is 1 When the digital input 1 is 0 the analog 1 input is directly output When setting the initial value carry out an operation with the initial value for input 1 and 0 applied to input 2 Then reflect the result as the initial value previous output value with 1 applied to input 2 During the initialization or when the CLC terminal is ON the previous output value is cleared to 0 Upward change rate Time taken to change 100 0 No limit 0 01 to 600 S Downward change rate Time taken to change 100 0 The same change rate as function 1 0 01 to 600 S 5000 Selector 3 Function to select analog input 2 based on Step No Not SO001 to SO200 required 5100 Selector4 Functio
41. 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Vector control with PG for asynchronous motor Vector control with PG for synchronous motor LL Refer to page 2 2 for the control mode of the inverter Current Limiter Level 2 46 Torque Vector control without PG for asynchronous motor 2 3 Overview of Function Code F44 specifies the activation level of the current limiter When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by F44 the current limiter works to manage the output current and reduce the motor torque z deyo When the output current drops below the level specified by F44 the inverter returns to the normal operation Data setting range 100 to 230 Percentage to the rated current of the inverter 999 The maximum current of each inverter automatically applies Note Since the current limit operation with F44 is performed by software it may cause a delay in control Electronic thermal overload protection for braking resistor Discharging capability Allowable average loss and Braking resistance value These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking 3002 NOILONNA resistor Set the discharging capability allowable average loss and resistance to F50 F51 and F52 respectively These values are determined by the inverter
42. 2 The factory default setting varies depending on the shipping destination 3 The unit changes depending on the setting of C21 2 4 BM 0001 p o Torque vector Software version which can be used 2 4 Function Code Tables E E codes Extension Terminal Functions Change Torque Software Code Data setting range when um actor version which Q running E can be used 7 E01 Command Assignment to Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to o X1 terminals X1 to X8 as listed below WARA N E02 X2 Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown below assigns 5 v E03 X3 a negative logic input to a terminal n v EZ L I L L v E05 s J E06 Lopes qr E07 LL ee ee o Eog l in 0 1000 S87 Select multistep speed 1 1 1001 SS2 Select multistep speed 2 2 1002 SS4 Select multistep speed 4 3 1003 SS8 amp Select multistep speed 8 7 1007 BX Coast to stop 8 1008 RST Reset alarm 9 1009 THR Enable extemal alarm trip 10 1010 JOG Enable jogging operation 2 Gm LE Enable communication Y 25 1025 U DI Universal DI v 27 1027 PG Hz Enable PG vector control 95 09 T8 Sdedwmwbasi N et 08 T8z Sded muetas2 CCC ee 02 H TB Wudtmuebas M 55 059 BATRY __Enablebatey operon Y 94 069 CRPLS Sncwepessopaon Y 25 089 BRKE Chectmkec
43. 2014 Same contactors that can be removed nowadays are used to short circuit motor phases when lift is stopped An alternative solution when main contactors are removed can be to use a power relay or mini contactor governed by the inverter in order to short circuit motor phases when lift is stopped This power relay or mini contactor can be directly wired in the dedicated U0 VO and WO terminals Inverter short circuit motor phases when no current is flowing from the inverter to the motor therefore relay or contactor doesn t need to be rated to motor s rated power 2 182 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Short circuit control Control mode L120 Behavior of motor phase short circuit can be defined by means of this parameter Depending on L120 setting short circuit will be performed under different conditions z deyo Data for L120 Action SCC output function will turn ON when RUN command is ON FWD or REV and EN terminal is ON SCC output function will turn OFF when IGBT s gate drivers are OFF and timer L86 is elapsed 0 default setting SCC output function will tum OFF only in certain conditions Conditions are described below Case 1 Inverter in alarm AZM output function ON Case 2 RBRK input function is ON It means that rescue by brake control will be performed Case 3 BRKE BRKEI or BRKE2 input functions are ON and BRKS output function is OFF It means that somebody opened the brake by
44. 3 gt 4 Type FRN Q 19LM2A 4E Serial No XXXXXXXXXXXXXX ROM Version Main 0300 KP 8000 Figure 3 17 Unit information screen display sample 3 25 o 9 m S d o z c ui O E E x r z N 3 4 4 5 Check Set travel direction counter function Travel Counter PRG gt 3 gt 5 This allows to check and set the travel direction counter TDC function For additional information about TDC function refer to related Application Note AN Lift2 0004v100EN 3 4 5 Alarm Information Alarm Info PRG gt 4 3 4 5 1 Check Alarm History Alarm History PRG gt 4 gt 1 For the most recent alarm and the past three shows alarm codes indicating the types of protective functions operated the number of consecutive alarms and the various inverter status at the time the alarm was triggered Table 3 14 Display items in Alarm History Category Alarm name Details Name of alarm Main alarm Triggered alarm code and alarm sub code which means detailed causes of alarm For detail about alarm sub code please contact us Overlapping alarm 1 Simultaneously triggered alarm code No 1 and alarm sub code If no alarm shows Overlapping alarm 2 Simultaneously triggered alarm code No 2 If no alarm shows Reference speed pre ramp Reference speed pre ramp currently specified Hz Reference speed final Speed Refere
45. Automatic magnetic pole position tuning is operated after output phase loss detection is done when automatic magnetic pole position tuning is effective RUN signal is turned OFF during output phase loss detection Operation sample a Multistep speed command F01 0 di OUR E a f e SEA gt x x gt Setting speed Setting speed Starting speed Starting speed 0 0 Reference speed Reference speed Starting speed Starting spedire po 0 1Hz 0 Ss EN EN Run command ON Run commnd M SW52 2 ON 32 2 rr es a m aN Cate M mm RUN N O O c mm Output phase loss Ex Output phase loss NN detection detection i ae ON sc O NENNEN 500ms L82 500ms L82 Vector control with PG Torque Vector control 2 101 c es Z O a O z Q Og m 02 b Analog speed command Not reversible F01 1 Setting speed Starting speed f H64 x2 H65 0 Reference speed Starting speed Run command ON Goto OM NN NN RUN Output phase loss detection Vector control with PG xr 500ms L82 I c TCT f c Analog speed command Reversible F01 2 L85 Setting speed Starting speed H64 0 Reference speed Starting speed Run command 52 O e Cote OM RUN Output phase loss detection BRKS
46. By definition this parameter cannot be bigger than L111 limit When L113 L111 inverter will tCA in this case please change suspension means and reset the counter Note After modify L113 counter make sure function is locked again To do so please turn the power supply of the inverter OFF wait until keypad is not lighted and switch ON again In figure 1 a basic time chart of TDC function is shown In this case L111 limit is set to 3 As it can be observed several travels in forward up and reverse down direction are shown When direction is changed from up to down or from down to up L113 counter increases one unit At same time an output programed with the function TDCP outputs a pulse On the other hand even starting a new travel direction is not changed nothing changes on outputs or counter In this example L112 is set to 60 When L113 counter reaches the value 2 which corresponds to the 66 66 of travel limit an output programed with the function TDCL changes from OFF to ON At same time light alarm for pre warning is shown in the keypad tCW When L113 counter reaches the value 3 inverter is blocked by the alarm tCA Even forward or reverse are activated inverter will not allow any other travel until suspension means are changed and L113 counter is reset 2 178 2 3 Overview of Function Code a Speed detected rpm ENT amp EN2 FWD REV TDCP TDCL Alarm ICA Light alarm tCW Dif mecs
47. Customizable logic timer monitor 0 Disable Step selection 1 to 200 Step 1 to 200 Task process cycle setting 0 Auto select from 2 5 10 or 20 ms depending on the number of steps 2 2 ms Up to 10 step 5 5 ms Up to 50 step 10 10 ms Up to 100 step 20 20ms Up to 200 step Customizable logic User parameter 1 9990 00 to 0 00 to 9990 00 Variable User parameter 2 User parameter 3 User parameter 4 User parameter 5 User parameter 6 User parameter 7 User parameter 8 User parameter 9 User parameter 10 User parameter 11 User parameter 12 User parameter 13 User parameter 14 User parameter 16 User parameter 17 User parameter 18 User parameter 19 a User parameter 15 User parameter 20 Customizable logic Strage area 1 9990 00 to 0 00 to 9990 00 Strage area 2 Strage area 3 Strage area 4 Strage area 5 Customizable logic setting step Step number tpa tjSemeas uo tnput 2 Seme as uos L Customizable logic ROM version Upper digit Monitor 0 to 9999 1 For User setting O to 9999 Customizable logic ROM version Lower digit Monitor O to 9999 For User setting O to 9999 2 14 Software version which can be used 2 4 Function Code Tables E y codes Link Functions Change Data Torque Software
48. E24 E27 Signal Assignment to Transistor signal Relay contact signal Y1 Y2 Y3A C Y4AIC Y5A C 30A B C f Change Default Torque Data setting range when s vector 5 setting running Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals Y1 to Y2 Y3A C to Y5A C and 30A B C as listed below Setting the value of 1000s in parentheses shown below assigns a negative logic output to a terminal 0 1000 RUN Inverter running 1 1001 FAR Speed arrival 2 1002 FDT Speed detected 3 1003 LU Undervoltage detected 10 1010 RDY Inverter ready to run 12 1012 SW52 2 MC control 25 1025 FAN Cooling fan operation 26 1026 TRY Auto resetting 27 1027 U DO Universal Do 28 1028 OH Overheat early warming 30 1030 L FE Service life alarm 31 1031 FDT2 Speed detected 35 1035 RUN2 Inverter output on Sr sry JD E Y 38 1038 D2 Current detected 2 52 1052 FRUN Encoder rotating in forward direction Y Y TO Wy DNZS Smedeiexe EN 71 1071 DSAG Speed agreement N 73 1073 DACC During acceleration TS sy DZR Dumgzemsped M Te Sk PGABN PGsmma EN T8 1078 DOFEN Doorconta Y 99 1086 ALM Namwiu E Y ior 0 DEGF ENimimddssindmutemr E wr my ENOFF ENemmaoe Y 104 1104 LVD Low voltage detected v We moy FAC EeWoWamhecdie Y Tr 6k DTUNE During E 109 M05 RRD Recomm
49. Ert If the inverter receives any data within the time specified by y35 ignore the communications error After the timeout coast to a stop and trip with Ert 3to 15 Same as y34 0 0 0 to 60 0 0 Standard 1 Compatible with FRENIC Lift LM1 0 Speed command 1 0 Do not clear the data of function codes Sxx Acceleration command when a communications error occurs compatible with the conventional inverters 1 Clear the data of function codes S01 S05 S19 when a communications error occurs 2 Clear the run command assigned bit of function code S06 when a communications error occurs 3 Clear both data of S01 S05 S19 and run command assigned bit of S06 when a communications eror occurs Related alarms Er8 ErP Ert 0 Store into nonvolatile memory Rewritable times are limited 1 Write into temporary memory Rewritable times are unlimited 2 Save all data from temporary memory to nonvolatile memory After all save retum to Data 1 Control command Run command 0 Follow H30 Follow H30 1 Via Loader Follow H30 2 Follow H30 Via Loader 3 Via Loader Via Loader Note Control commands include Speed command Torque current command and Torque bias command 2 16 Default setting Data format No Torque vector control Software version which can be used 2 4 Function Code Tables E L codes Lift Functions Change Data Torque Software 2 Data Default N Code Data setting range Increment
50. For details refer to section 2 2 Reference Deviation S z gt eed speed J7 N Jm idi d regulator pre ramp S curve ramp L controller L09 Filter time constant Negative 0 Positive for reference deviation deviation speed final ON Speed agreement Detected OFF OFF delay signal DSAG speed ce H74 Hysteresis H74 Hysteresis H75 Speed agreement H74 Hysteresis OFF delay time 2 94 2 3 Overview of Function Code H76 PG Error Detection for Mode3 Detecting level PG abnormal operation choice PG Error Detection Detection level PG Error Detection Detection time PG Error Detection for mode 3 Detecting time Setting detecting range and time when using PG abnormal mode 3 Data setting range H76 0 to 50 Data setting range H77 0 0 to 10 0 s LL For details refer to function code L90 L92 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain The inverter output current driving the motor may fluctuate due to the motor characteristics and or backlash in the machine Modifying the H80 data adjusts the controls in order to suppress such fluctuation However as incorrect setting of this gain may cause larger current fluctuation do not modify the default setting unless it is necessary Data setting range H80 0 00 to 0 40 Note Itis a special code of the torque vector control Refer to page 2 2 for the control mode of the inve
51. H TB Function code data 62 Turning this terminal command ON holds torque bias setting Turning it OFF release the hold status For details refer to the description of function code L55 Torque Bias Startup time E Enable battery operation BATRY Function code data 63 Turning this terminal command ON selects operation by batteries For details refer to the description of function code C03 Battery Operation Speed 2 51 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA B Start creepless operation CRPLS Function code data 64 Turning this terminal command ON starts creepless operation For details refer to the description of function code L34 Elevator Parameter Moving distance in creepless operation E Check brake control BRKE Function code data 65 This terminal command is used to check whether or not the actual brake is working normally using the BRKS output from the inverter Configure an external circuit that turns this command ON or OFF when the brake is released or activated respectively For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L80 to L84 Brake Control and H96 E Force to decelerate DRS Function code data 66 In normal inverter operation this terminal command should be ON If this terminal command is OFF the motor will be forced to decelerate with deceleration time specified by function code H56 For details refer to the description of function code H56 Deceleration Time for Fo
52. Hz no PG error can be detected Excessive speed deviation Reference speed final gt Detected speed If L90 0 When the speed is within domains D through 9 in the above graph the inverter regards it as an error Independent of the PG error detection the inverter continues to run If a PG abnormal signal PG ABN is assigned to any general purpose programmable output terminal by setting 76 with E20 to E24 and E27 the inverter turns the PG ABN ON If L90 1 When the speed is within domains D through 9 in the above graph the inverter regards it as an error and stops with an excessive speed deviation error ErE If L90 2 When the speed is within domains D through in the above graph the inverter regards it as an error and stops with an excessive speed deviation error ErE If L90 3 When the speed is within domains D through in the above graph and when the speed is within domains D or in the above graph the inverter regards it as an error and stops with an excessive speed deviation error ErE 2 167 The content of the previous page is recorded in the following tables Data for L90 If a PG error is detected the inverter PG Error PG error detection conditions Outputs Trips with alarm Outputs Detection Mode ALM indication PG ABN The speed 1s within domains D OFF ON through in the above graph during the detection time L92 The speed 1s within domains D through in the a
53. Inverter stops output Ramp status Acc During acceleration Dec During deceleration Const During constant speed lt Blank gt Stopped Motor type IM Induction motor asynchronous motor PMSM Permanent magnet synchronous motor Selected control mode PG IM Vector control with PG for IM PG PM Vector control with PG for PMSM TV Torque vector open loop control for IM Running status PG Hz E Enable vector control TrqLimit B During torque limitation LowVolt Bi During low supply voltage Operational status FAR B Frequency attained Frequency detection FDT B Frequency detection Run preparation RDY E Ready to run ee nen ec FAN E Cooling fan operating Motor overload TRY E Trying automatic resetting alarm Fan operating OH i Overheat early warning Retrying LIFE n Lifetime warning un overheat early P B Current detection Lifetime alarm ID2 m Current detection 2 Mia 5 revenon OLP Overload prevention controlled Current detection ID Current detection Di Control circuit terminal input signal terminal input FWD REV X1 X8 EN1 EN2 ON OFF information on control circuits terminal input Reversal on short circuit no reversal when open Di Link Communications port input signal FWD REV X1 X8 XF XR RST Input information on communication specific function code S06 Reversal on 1 no reversal on 0 Do Output signal Y1 Y2 Y3A Y5A 30ABC Output signal information
54. L gt i L144 BRKS M e Figure 1 Level detection 1 LCI As it can be observed as soon as BRKS signal goes to ON L144 timer starts to count On the other hand as soon as mechanical brake opens torque output current increases but some time 1s needed to stabilize torque at zero speed When L144 timer is elapsed because torque is below L145 level output function LCI is going to ON state This is understood as one person inside the car or similar situation LCI is kept to ON until current torque is completely removed from the motor When current is removed from the motor it is understood that travel is finished LC1 signal will go to OFF when travel is finished E Load cell function LCF detection level L146 Torque level set on this parameter will be understood as torque needed to keep zero speed when car is full In order to set L146 correctly please check torque at zero speed when full load is inside car after rollback is compensated Speed 4 mm s Torque L147 L146 Run command FWD REV Mechanical brake LCF i NENNEN NENNEN gt L144 Figure 2 Full load detection level LCF 2 190 2 3 Overview of Function Code As it can be observed as soon as BRKS signal goes to ON L144 timer starts to count On the other hand as soon as mechanical brake opens torque output current increases but some time 1s needed to stabilize torque at zero speed When
55. No timer On delay timer Off delay timer One shot pulse output Retriggerable timer Pulse train output Only a general purpose timer No logic function block exists Turning the input signal ON starts the on delay timer When the period specified by the timer has elapsed the output signal turns ON Turning the input signal OFF turns the output signal OFF Turning the input signal ON turns the output signal ON Turning the input signal OFF starts the off delay timer When the period specified by the timer has elapsed the output signal turns OFF Turning the input signal ON issues a one shot pulse whose length is specified by the timer Turning the input signal ON issues a one shot pulse whose length is specified by the timer If the input signal is turned ON again during the preceding one shot pulse length however the logic unction block issues another one shot pulse If the input aa turns ON the logic function block issues ON and OFF pulses omr lengths are specified by the timer alternately and repeatedly This function is used to flash a luminescent device 20 to 25 30 to 35 Logical AND t General purpose timer Logical OR General purpose timer AND function with 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer R function with 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer 40 to 45 50 to 55 Logical XOR General purpose timer Set priority flip flop General purpose tim
56. ON brake open when time set on L118 elapses Timer L118 must be lower than L119 timer otherwise inverter will trip rbA unnecessary E Rescue operation by brake control Speed detection delay time L119 When BRKS signal is ON brake opened some detected speed from the motor is expected If no speed is detected it can be because motor is not turning balanced condition or locked condition or because encoder is broken It is understood as no speed detected no movement any speed below speed level set on L108 When speed is below L108 timer L119 starts to count If speed doesn t reache speed level set on L108 when timer L119 elapses inverter will trip rbA alarm Timer L118 must be lower than L119 timer otherwise inverter will trip rbA unnecessary Figure 1 shows a rescue operation by motor brake control when speed limit is not reached As it can be observed as soon as RBRK input function is activated brake opens After that motor speed increases because of inertia Speed is below level set in function code L117 Because limit is not reached BRKS signal is not going to OFF RBRK signal is removed by the controller when floor level is reached Motor Speed mm s EN1 amp EN2 RUN command FWD or REV RBRK xc e Figure 1 Timing diagram when limit speed is not reached Figure 2 shows a rescue operation by motors brake control when L117 speed limit is reached As it can be observed as
57. PNY 0 Continue tory o Y 0 Continue to run 1 Trip at alarm mode 1 with alarm 2 Trip at alarm mode 2 with alam 3 Trip at alarm mode 3 with alarm Overheat Early Warming Level KEN to 20 Magnetic Pole Position E Protecting operation selection i to 11111111 0 to 255 01000000 switch In each bit 0 for disabled 1 for enabled el Bito over torque sam CE Bit0 Over torque alarm GE Bit1 Drive continuance mode when specific alarm Bit2 Reserved Bit3 ENOFF signal output mode Bit4 Calculate ASR with only speed command during ULC Bit5 Reserved Bit6 FAN ON OFF control during battery operation Bit7 Reserved Control Switch 00000000 to 111111115 0 to 255 In each bit 0 for disabled 1 for enabled BitO Current confirmation when starting for synchronous motor Bit1 Rewrite magnetic pole position offset angle tuning by PPT Bit2 Torque bias operation with offset Bit3 Select short floor operation mode Bit4 Rise direction definition for DCP Bit5 S1 bit selection for DCP Bit6 DOPEN function change Bit7 Reserved Note Bit 1 is effective only for tuning by PPT Encoder Rotation Detection 0 0 to 500 0 mm s Travel direction counter Password setting 0000u to FFFFu N N 00004 Y 00004 Disable TDC function 00014 to FFFFu Enable TDC function Travel limit Waming level Partial number of direction changes Total number of direction changes Number of counter r
58. Rated speed r min Synchronous speed r min When the P12 is setted 0 00 operation will fllowed by Fuji standard motor rated slip frequency Motor capacity P02 Control data of P12 0 00 P60 P62 Motor Armature resistance Rs and P63 Armature q axis reactance Xs Interphase inductive voltage E P60 P62 and P63 specify the armature resistance q axis inductance and interphase inductive voltage of the motor respectively These functions are used with L130 to L133 2 84 2 3 Overview of Function Code 2 3 5 H codes High performance functions Data Initialization Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults z deyo To change the H03 data it is necessary to press the 69 Q keys simultaneous keying H03 data Function Disable initialization Settings manually made by the user will be retained Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults Vector control for asynchronous motors SHd09 NOILONNA System specific initialization Vector control for synchronous motors System specific initialization Open loop control for asynchronous motors Limited initialization except communications function codes Limited initialization initialization of customizable logic function U U1 codes Tip Upon completion of the initialization the H03 data reverts to 0 factory default E Initialize all function c
59. Since the data setting can be done with the loader no keypad operation is required While the loader is selected as the source for the run command if the PC runs out of control and cannot be stopped by a stop command sent from the loader disconnect the RS485 communications cable from the loader s port connect a keypad instead and reset the y99 to 0 This makes the function code H30 to issue control and run commands as shown in the following table Note that the inverter cannot save the setting of y99 When the inverter is turned off the data in y99 will back to 0 Function Data for y99 x Control command Run command Follow H30 Follow H30 Via Loader Follow H30 Follow H30 Via Loader Via Loader Via Loader s Control command refers to a speed command or reference torque bias 2 135 2 3 8 L codes Lift functions L01 Pulse Encoder Selection L01 specifies the specifications of a pulse encoder system to be used for speed detection Data for L01 Applicable encoder specifications A B phase output Absolute signal spec Required option Applicable motor 12 15V complementary 12 15V open collector 5V line driver OPC GI PG OPC GI PG2 OPC PMPG Asynchronous motor 12 15V complementary 5V line driver OPC GI PG OPC GI PG2 OPC PMPG Synchronous motor Sinusoidal differential voltage 1 Vp p EnDat2 1 HEIDENHAIN ECN1313 or its
60. Torque bias balance adjustment Offset BTBB balance BTBB v Used to adjust the analog torque bias 0 Used to adjust the analog torque bias Torque bias gain adjustment BTBG BTBG m l n vector control with PG this item shows the reference torque LL The monitor items of sub monitors 1 and 2 can be selected easily in Programming mode as follows PRG gt I Start up gt 3 Disp Setting gt 4 Sub Monitor 1 PRG gt I Start up gt 3 Disp Setting gt 5 Sub Monitor 2 2 196 2 3 Overview of Function Code Bar Chart 1 Display item selection Bar Chart 2 Display item selection Bar Chart 3 Display item selection These function codes specify the items to be displayed in bar graphs 1 to 3 on the LCD monitor Data setting range 1 to 30 Monitor item LCD indicator Definition of monitor amount 100 Reference speed Final Spd Rated Speed F03 Output current Iout Twice the inverter rated current c z O a O z Q Og m Q 200 V class 250 V Output voltage Vout 400 V class 500 V Calculated torque TRQ Twice the rated motor torque Input power PWR The inverter rated capacity Reference torque TRQC Twice the rated motor torque Torque bias balance adjustment Offset BTBB BTBB Twice the rated motor torque Torque bias gain adjustment BTBG BTBG Twice the rated motor torque LL The monitor items for
61. Unit when format vector version which copying setting running No control can be used 12 15 V Complementary z deyo Open collector 5 V Line driver 112 15 V Complementary Open collector 5 V Line driver biu NN BiSS C Sendix5873 compatible 7 Sinusoidal differential SSI ECN1313 compatible Kl c cq jus oidal differe Hiperface SRS50 compatible B cu CM L02 e A v L03 Magnetic Pole Position Offset MIIE E a ER E Er En Tuning 0 Disable 1 Reserved for particular manufacturers S302 NOILONNA 3 Reserved for particular manufacturers 4 Enable motor stopped 5 Enable motor rotated Note This setting is effective if F42 1 1 to 4 Itis a recommended condition that the brake is a close 5 Itis necessary condition that the brake is a release and without load L04 Offset angle 0 00 to 360 00 Retum value of L03 Note This setting is effective if F42 7 1 Los Reserved ff t Resevet S Eoo t LO7 JAuto magnetic Pole Position tuning mode select 0 Disable 1 Enable 3 Enable with checking accuracy 4 Enable for SPM Note This setting is effective if F42 1 1 to 4 Itis a recommended condition that the brake is a close Log L10 L11 Multistep Speed Command Combination Zero Speed 00000000 to 00000111 0 to 7 L12 Manual Speed Middle Note If a binary value within the range from 00000000 to L13 Maintenance Speed 00000111 is double assigned the inv
62. Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Customizable logic Step 1 to 14 function code is assigned as follows Setting value is the same as U01 to UOS set 5e ses ses sms sens Ser sens Seo Se Seri sez Sens sev possess p wr we um ww um um us us ue we us ue ue ue U32 U37 U42 U47 U52 U57 U62 U67 u01 U06 u02 U07 09 U21 U26 022 U27 Function 2 U10 U25 U30 U35 2 13 Code U71 U72 U73 U74 U75 U76 U77 U78 U79 U80 U81 U82 U83 U84 U85 U86 U87 U88 U89 U90 U91 U100 U121 U122 U123 U124 U125 U126 U127 U128 U129 U130 U131 U132 U133 U134 U135 U136 U137 U138 U139 U140 U171 U172 U173 U174 U175 U190 U191 U192 U193 U194 U195 U196 U197 U198 U199 Change when running Torque vector Data copying Default setting Name Data setting range Increment Unit control Customizable logic Output selection Output signal 1 0 Disable Output signal 2 1 to 200 Output of Step 1 to 200 SO001 to 50200 Output signal 3 Output signal 4 Output signal 5 Output signal 6 Output signal 7 Output signal 8 Output signal 9 Output signal 10 Customizable logic Function selection Output signal 1 Oxxx 1xxx Same as E01 Output signal 2 8xxx The value with 8000 added to E61 Output signal 3 Output signal 4 Output signal 5 Output signal 6 Output signal 7 Output signal 8 Output signal 9 Output signal 10
63. a function code group code from the following table to function 1 such as U04 and set the last two digits of the function code number to function 2 such as U05 to specify individual function codes F 0 Basic function L1 56 Lift function E 1 Terminal function L2 57 Lift function C 2 Control function K 28 Keypad function P 3 Motorl M 8 Monitor H 4 High performance function W 15 Monitor 2 H1 31 High performance function W1 22 Monitor 3 U 11 Customizable logic W2 23 Monitor 4 Ul 39 Customizable logic x 16 Alarm 1 y 14 Link function Z 17 Alarm 2 L 9 Lift function E Task process cycle setting U100 U100 data Data 0 Automatically adjusts the task cycle from 2 ms to 10 ms depending on the number of used steps This is the factory default It is recommended to use this value 2 2 ms Up to 10 steps If it exceeds 10 steps the customizable logic does not work 5 5ms Up to 50 steps If it exceeds 50 steps the customizable logic does not work 10 10 ms Up to 100 steps If it exceeds 100 steps the customizable logic does not work 20 20 ms Up to 200 steps Note that if it exceeds the steps defined in 2 5 or 10 the customizable logic does not work 2 126 2 3 Overview of Function Code B Operating precautions The customizable logics are executed within 2 ms to 20 ms according to U100 and processed in the following procedure 1 First latch the external inpu
64. a load torque that can be a vibration element and applies it to the reference torque for canceling the load torque This way the observer quickly attenuates the vibration caused by resonance of machinery E Gain L49 L49 specifies the compensation gain for the vibration suppression observer Specification of 0 00 disables the observer Usually set the gain within the range from 0 00 to 0 50 Data setting range 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 1 00 B integral time L50 L50 specifies the integral time of the observer No change is required except special cases Data setting range 0 005 to 1 000 s E Load inertia L51 L51 specifies the moment of inertia of the load After converting the moment of inertia of the motor and traction machine for the motor shaft use the value Data setting range 0 01 to 655 35 kgm L52 Start Control Mode F23 Starting Speed L52 specifies the start control mode Data for L52 Function Enable speed start mode Enable torque start mode For details refer to the description of F23 2 150 2 3 Overview of Function Code Torque Bias Mode L58 Torque Bias P constant L59 Torque Bias constant L60 Torque Bias Driving gain L61 Torque Bias Braking gain L62 Torque Bias Digital 1 L63 Torque Bias Digital 2 L64 Torque Bias Digital 3 L54 specifies whether to use analog or digital torque bias Data for L54 Function Enable analog torque bias
65. bar charts 1 to 3 can be selected easily in Programming mode as follows PRG gt 1 Start up gt 3 Disp Setting gt 6 Bar Chart 1 PRG gt 1 Start up gt 3 Disp Setting gt 7 Bar Chart 2 PRG gt 1 Start up gt 3 Disp Setting gt 8 Bar Chart 3 k3 Traveling direction selection K23 specifies the relation between FWD REV and Upward Downward for keypad displaying Data for K23 moving FWD moving REV Downward Upward 2 197 Shortcut Key Function for X in Running Mode Shortcut Key Function for gt in Running Mode These function codes define jump to menus on the and keys as a shortcut key Pressing the shortcut keys or o in Running mode jumps the screen to the previously defined menu Assigning frequently used menus to the shortcut keys allows a single touch of the shortcut key to open the target menu screen Data setting range 0 Disable 11 to 99 Example Data 1 1 Sub menu Menu Jump to Data for K91 K92 Menu Sub menu 0 Disable 11 Start up Language 12 App select 13 Disp setting 21 Function Codes Data Set 22 23 Data Check Changed Data Data Copy Initialize INV Info Op Monitor I O Check Maintenance Unit Info Travel counter Alarm Info Alarm History User Config Select Q Setup Tools CL
66. capaciy K 1 2 47 E Allowable average loss F51 Allowance average loss is the resistor capacitor that enables continuous operation of motor It can be calculated from ED and motor capacity kW FST ata 0 001 to 99 99 0 001 to 99 99 kW Alloable avarege loss kW ED 100 x Motor rated capacity kW 2 Braking resistance value F52 F52 specifies the resistance of the braking resistor F52 data Function None 0 00 Not applicable set this parameter different than 0 0 01 to 999 0 01 to 999 Q 2 48 2 3 2 2 3 Overview of Function Code E codes Extension terminal functions E01 to E08 Command Assignment to X1 to X8 Command Assignment to FWD and REV E98 and E99 z deyo E01 to E08 E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals X1 to X8 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or OFF status of each terminal The default setting is normal logic system Active ON Following table show the commands that can be assigned with the general purpose programmable input terminals X1 to X8 FWD and REV Explanations for the commands that follow are given in normal logic system Active ON SHd09 NOILONNA ANCAUTION power change in speed To the general purpose programmable
67. code Settings guideline Rated speed Set the rated speed Base speed Set the base speed of the motor Rated voltage Set the rated voltage of the motor Control mode Set 1 Motor No of poles Set the number of poles of the motor Motor Rated capacity Set the rated capacity of the motor Motor Rated current Set the rated current of the motor Motor R1 P07 Set 5 Motor X PO8 Unused Pulse encoder Selection LO1 Set the number depending on applied option card and encoder Pulse encoder Resolution L02 Set the number of pulses per revolution of the PG mounted on the motor Magnetic pole position offset L04 Do tuning of the magnetic pole position offset The tuning Offset angle result automatically writes onto L04 data ASR P constant at high L36 Set 2 00 or less to run the motor by itself speed ASR P constant at low speed L38 Set 2 00 or less to run the motor by itself When the target motor is of a synchronous motor complete the wiring between the inverter motor and encoder before doing tuning 2 137 Tuning procedure when L03 4 Tuning with motor stopped 1 Specify the rated speed F03 base speed F04 rated voltage F05 control mode F42 no of poles PO1 rated capacity P02 rated current P03 R1 P07 X P08 pulse encoder selection L01 resolution L02 ASR P constant at high speed L36 and ASR P constant at lo
68. compensation amount to apply after the UNBL command is turned ON Data setting range 0 01 to 2 00 s LL Refer to the descriptions of function codes L56 and L65 for details Unbalanced load compensation ASR P constant L68 specifies the ASR Automatic Speed Regulator P constant to use in unbalanced load calculation Set a larger constant than the one specified in normal operation If vibration occurs decrease it Data setting range 0 00 to 200 00 Unbalanced load compensation ASR I constant L69 specifies the ASR I constant to use in unbalanced load calculation Set a smaller constant than the one specified in normal operation If vibration occurs increase it Data setting range 0 001 to 1 000 s L73 Unbalance load compensation APR P constant L73 specifies the APR Automatic Position Regulator I constant to use in unbalanced load calculation If vibration occurs decrease it Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 Unbalance load compensation APR D constant L74 specifies the APR D constant to use in unbalanced load calculation Data setting range 0 0 to 10 0 Unbalance load compensation Filter Time Constant for Detected Speed L75 specifies the APR I constant to use in unbalanced load calculation Data setting range 0 000 to 0 100 s Unbalance load compensation ACR P constant L76 specifies the ACR Automatic Current Regulator P constant to use in unbalanced load calculation If vibration occ
69. control Operation setting switch 1 00000000 to 111111115 0 to 255 00000000 In each bit 0 for disabled 1 for enabled BitO Fixation of the carrier frequency 1 Enable 16kHz fixed mode Bit1 Masked parameters depending on set control mode 1 Hidden enable depends on F42 Bit2 Reserved Bit3 Reserved Bit4 Reserved Bit5 Reserved Bit6 Ground fail detection cancel 1 Cancel Bit7 Short detection cancel 1 Cancel Operation setting switch 2 00000000 to 11111111 0 to 255 00000000 In each bit 0 for disabled 1 for enabled BitO Bit7 Reserved for particular manufacturer Pulse output ps PR PS PSH AB pulse output order 0 Normal pomme a Z pulse output 0 Enable pO owe Reserved 00000 opo 0 0 NT vp ep Pulse output AB pulse output hysteresis 0 Disable 1 Enable Reserved ee NEN IRsevea 1 IRsevea 1 Serial encoder communication Number of ST bits 0 to 25 eene me O Resevet 00000 op v e 4 Reserved for particular manufacturers Do not access this function code 2 20 Software version which can be used 2 4 Function Code Tables E K codes Keypad Functions optional Change Data Torque Software j Data Default Code Name Data setting range Increment Unit when pou vector version which A copying setting running control can be used K01 LCD Monitor Language selection 0 Japanese 1 English K02 Backlight of
70. curve Setting 10 to 14 F01 Speed Command L19 to L28 specify S curve zones to be applied to operations driven by multistep speed commands with S curve acceleration deceleration The setting values are indicated in percentage to the maximum speed Data setting range 0 to 50 96 LL Refer to the description of function code F01 for details Zero speed control time F23 F24 Starting Speed Setting zero speed or DC braking control time Keeping zero speed or DC braking from the moment that gate comes ON until setting time Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s For details refer to function code F23 F24 Starting Speed Soft start time F23 Starting Speed H65 specifies the acceleration time until the speed reaches the starting speed The specified time is the one required for accelerating from 0 00 to the starting speed r min Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 s LL For details refer to function code F23 Stop Speed Detection method F25 Stop Speed H66 specifies the stop speed detection method Data for H66 Detection method Use the detected speed Use the reference speed final L For details refer to the description of function code F25 In case of Torque Vector Control inverter uses Reference Speed Final Stop Speed Holding time F25 Stop Speed H67 specifies the run command holding time as soon as stop speed is reached Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s For de
71. for V2 Gain C43 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 Filter time constant E61 E62 and E63 define the functions of terminals 12 V2 V2 function and V2 C1 function respectively Terminals 12 and V2 V2 function are voltage input terminals and terminal V2 C1 function is the current input terminal Data for E61 Input assigned to E62 or E63 12 and V2 Description 0 None Speed command Input an analog speed command to terminal 12 or V2 Not reversible operation V2 function by 0 to 10 VDC and V2 C1 function without polarity by 4 to 20 mADC for 0 to 10096 of the maximum speed Input an analog speed command to terminal 12 or V2 Speed command V2 function by 10 to 10 VDC for 100 to 100 of the Reversible operation maximum speed with polarity Do not assign this data for the terminal V2 C1 function Input an analog torque bias to terminal 12 or V2 V2 function by 10 to 10 VDC for 100 to 100 of the Torque bias rated torque in analog command value command Input an analog torque bias to terminal V2 C1 function by 4 to 20 mADC for 0 to 10096 of the rated torque in analog command value When C22 is 0 Set 1 or 2 to E61 E62 E63 when you want to use the analog multistep speed command When C22 is 1 Set 1 or 2 to E63 when you want to use the analog multistep speed command Do not set 1 or 2 to E61 and E62 LL Refer to the descriptions of fu
72. function code When counter L113 reaches this level in other words when L111 L113 inverter will be blocked by tCA Data for L111 Action OFF Disabled 0 01 10 00 Million Maximum number of travel direction changes allowed Where 0 01 direction changes are 10 000 changes and 10 00 are 10 000 000 changes E Travel direction counter Warning level L112 A warning level can be set in this parameter TDCI When counter L113 reaches the percentage set in this function code of L111 limit output function TDCI will go to ON state On the other hand inverter will trip the light alarm tCW L197 bit0 Data for L112 Action 0 Disabled 1 Tripping level of TDCI output function and light alarm Percentage 1 90 level is refered to L111 limit E Travel direction counter Partial number of direction changes L113 Partial number of direction changes is shown in this parameter When running direction is changed from FWD to REV or from REV to FWD and inverter in enabled EN terminal ON L113 counter is increased one unit Data for L113 Action OFF Disabled 0 01 10 00 Million Maximum number of travel direction changes allowed Where 0 01 direction changes are 10 000 changes and 10 00 are 10 000 000 changes This parameter can be modified and has to be set to 0 00 when suspension means has been changed When this parameter is modified value is changed reset counter L115 is increased one unit
73. input terminals you can assign commands to the switching means for the run command and its operation the reference speed pre ramp and the motor drive Be aware of that switching of any of such signals may cause a sudden start running or an abrupt An accident or physical injury may result Function code data Terminal commands assigned Active ON Active OFF 0 1000 Select multistep speed 1 SSI 1 1001 Select multistep speed 2 SS2 2 1002 Select multistep speed 4 SS4 3 1003 Select multistep speed 8 SS8 7 1007 Enable coast to stop BX 8 1008 Reset alarm RST 1009 9 Enable external alarm trip THR 10 1010 Enable jogging operation JOG 24 1024 Enable communications link via RS485 or CAN LE 25 1025 Universal DI U DI 27 1027 Enable PG vector control PG Hz 60 1060 Select torque bias 1 TBI 61 1061 Select torque bias 2 TB2 62 1062 Hold torque bias H TB 63 1063 Enable battery operation BATRY 64 1064 Start creepless operation CRPLS 65 1065 Check brake control BRKE 1066 66 Force to decelerate DRS 67 1067 Start unbalance load compensation UNBL 69 Magnetic pole position offset tuning command PPT 80 1080 Customizable logic Cancel CLC 81 1081 Customizable logic All timer clear CLTC 98 7 Run forward Exclusively assigned to FWD and FWD REV terminals by E98 and E99 99 i Run reverse Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV REV terminals by E98 and E99 10
74. is turned off during running LL Refer to the description of function code F23 for the timing chart to be applied when an analog speed command is selected Analog input Filter time for 12 12 Offset Gain constant E61 Analog speed ge command O Pix gt tO Ot Polarity 7 v 21 2 10 V 100 Qo J No polarity C31 032 it Analog input 0 to 10 V 0 to 100 for C1 100 M2 SW4 C1 Analog speed d i er S Ni 6 x f eference speed command O O O gt l gt ro k ATN pre ramp 4 to 20 mA 0 to 100 0 o C36 C37 C38 Analog input for V 2 Speed command E63 F01 Pi ity sw4 v2 c e olari 1 u x tO 04 096 10 V 100 O O 21 E tee No polarity o 42O 1 100 2K 0 to 10 V 0 to 100 errr J J cn Tip Offset gain and filter time constant can be specified for analog input voltage input to terminals 12 and V2 V2 function and current input to terminal V2 C1 function Refer to C31 to C33 C36 to C38 and C41 to C43 E Analog multistep speed command Setting 3 to the function code F01 enables analog multistep speed command In this mode C22 specifies the analog input type of this function Function This type selects reference speed by analog voltage current This type selects reference speed by s
75. issued to SO001 to SO200 respectively SOO001 to SO200 differ in configuration depending upon the connection destination as listed below To relay those outputs to any function other than the customizable logic route them via customizable logic outputs CLO1 to CLO10 Connection destination of each step output Input of customizable logic Configuration Select one of the internal step output signals 0001 to SO200 in customizable logic input setting Function code Such as U02 and U03 Input of inverter sequence processor such as multistep speed SS1 or operation command FWD Select one of the internal step output signals S0001 to S0200 to be connected to customizable logic output signals 1 to 10 CLO1 to CLO10 Select an inverter s sequence processor input function to which one of the customizable logic output signals 1 to 10 CLO1 to CLO10 is to be connected Same as in E01 Analog input such as Speed command Select one of the internal step output signals SOO01 to S0200 to be connected to customizable logic output signals 1 to 10 CLO1 to CLO10 Select an analog input function to which one of the customizable logic output signals 1 to 10 CLO1 to CLO10 is to be connected Same as in E61 General purpose digital output Y terminals Select one of the internal step output signals 0001 to
76. it goes OFF when the detected speed drops below the Detection level E31 or E36 Hysteresis band width E32 This output signal is not affected by a run command For details refer to the description of function codes E31 E36 and E32 Speed Detection E Undervoltage detected LU Function code data 3 This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage level and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level E Inverter ready to run RDY Function code data 10 This output signal comes ON when the inverter becomes ready to run by satisfying all of the following conditions Terminal EN1 EN2 ON BX OFF No alarm detected DC link bus voltage higher than the specified undervoltage level Initialization of options completed Note that the entry of a BATRY command always turns the RDY signal OFF E MC control SW52 2 Function code data 12 This output signal is used for MC control For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L85 and L86 MC Control E Cooling fan in operation FAN Function code data 25 This output signal is ON when the cooling fan is in operation and OFF when it is stopped This signal can be used to make the cooling system of peripheral equipment interlocked for an ON OFF control 2 59 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA E Auto resetting TRY Function code data 26 This output signal comes ON w
77. key switches to the selection screen of the LCD monitor content W In Programming mode Pressing this key established the selected items and data being changed W In Alarm mode Pressing this key switches to the alarm detailed information screen Pressing this key calls up the HELP screen according to the current display state Holding it down for 2 seconds toggles between the remote and local modes Pressing this key starts running the motor in the forward rotation when local mode Pressing this key starts running the motor in the reverse rotation when local mode Pressing this key stops the motor when local mode 3 1 LCD monitor keys and LED indicators on the keypad B LCD Monitor The LCD monitor shows various information of the inverter according to the operation modes lt Screen sample in Running mode gt Status icons IX REV a Speed Main monitor 1450 s Running status RUN f Sub monitors 18 004 7 23kw Travel direction indicator Operational guide Help available icon Shows the related info while scrolling Status message Shows the running status to be informed EINREN R Speed 1450 Cf in Spd BENEENEEEEE Iout aoe bee PWR BERE raa E Gi ProgramMenufg Bar graphs lt Screen sample in Alarm mode gt Alarm information REM Latest Alarm Alarm code OC 1 Alarm name Overlapping alarm 1 and 2 Nothing appears if there is no alar
78. logic timers CLTC function codes E01 to E08 Data 81 If the CLTC terminal function is assigned to a general purpose input terminal and this input is tum ON all the general purpose timers and counters in the customizable logic are reset It is used to reset and restart the system when for example the timing of external sequence cannot be consistent with internal customizable logic due to a momentary power failure CLTC Function OFF Normal operation Resets all the general purpose timers and counters in the customizable logic To reactivate it turn it OFF again ON 2 128 2 3 Overview of Function Code 2 3 7 y codes Link functions y01 to y20 RS 485 communication setting 1 and 2 In the RS 485 communication two systems can be connected Function Equipment that can be code connected Multi function keypad tien E Remote keypad RS 485 comm tion link t1 Morro ere EA y01 to y10 Inverter supporting loader Connection method k i RJ 45 connector to connect keypad Host equipments upper equipments Host equipments upper equipments Inverter supporting loader Via RS 485 communications link port 2 11 20 Via digital input terminal blocks DX DX ylity Overview of the equipments is given below 1 Keypad Multi function keypad and remote keypad can be connected to operate and monitor the inverter Regardless of the y code settings both of keypads are availab
79. of customizable logic Terminal command CLTC clears all customizable logic timers For details refer to the descriptions of function codes U codes 2 52 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Run forward FWD Function code data 98 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop C Tip This terminal command FWD can be assigned only to E98 or E99 B Run reverse REV Function code data 99 Turning this terminal command REV ON runs the motor in the reverse direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop amp Tip This terminal command REV can be assigned only to E98 or E99 E No function assigned NONE Function code data 100 Function code data 100 It allows the inverter to run unaffected by ON OFF of signals It is used when a signal is externally input using customizable logic It is also used to temporarily disable a terminal function E External alarm 2 THR2 Function code data 101 Before the alarm will happen if inverter keeps driving for ten seconds When the inverter shut down the output within ten seconds alarm will happen For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L98 bit E Start reference torque decreasing RTDEC Function code data 102 The inverter decreases reference torque to initial torque bias when turning RTDEC command OFF For details refer to the de
80. port 2 Speed command 3 CAN Run command Torque bias command med ane Se Alternative settings as below are available 0x0005 Equivalent with 0x0030 0x0006 Equivalent with 0x0033 0x000E Equivalent with 0x0333 LL For details refer to Chapter 1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC and the RS485 Communication User s Manual or CAN Communication User s Manual Note When the LE terminal command is assigned to a digital input terminal and the terminal is ON the settings of function code H30 is effective When the terminal is OFF the settings of the code are ineffective and both speed commands and run commands specified from the inverter itself take control Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor H42 displays the measured capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor Data setting range 0 to 65535 Cumulative Run Time of Cooling Fan H43 displays the cumulative run time of the cooling fan in units of 10hours Data setting range 0 to 9999 Initial Capacitance of DC Link Bus Capacitor H47 displays the initial value of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor Data setting range 0 to 65535 Cumulative Run Time of Capacitors on Printed Circuit Board H48 displays the cumulative run time of capacitors on the printed circuit boards in units of 10hours Data setting range 0 to 9999 2 91 c es Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Acceleration Time Jogging Decele
81. rbA alarm When inverter trips an alarm BRKS output function goes to OFF immediately Even RUN command or EN amp EN2 are activated during alarm state as it is happening with standard operation BRKS output function will not be activated 2 181 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Motor Speed mm s L117 L108 0 EN1 amp EN2 RUN command FWD or REV RBRK Sm 8770 cRKS ESEOCNEAAEEENNN 777000 Alarm a L119 Figure 4 Inverter locked by rbA case 2 L120 Short circuit control Control mode L121 Short circuit control Check time While motor is stopped motor brakes are closed If for any reason motor brakes are opened externally during installation or maintenance for example motor will turn free in to the loads direction In case of PMSM because it has no gearbox the speed of the lift moving due to gravity can reach quite high speeds On the other hand when motor phases are short circuited it generates a torque which makes rotating speed slower Because of this market trend is to short circuit motor phases when lift is in standstill Motor phases are short circuited to have an additional safety On the other hand market trend is moving to contactorless solutions Without contactors installation wiring is easier there is less maintenance and acoustic noise is reduced FRENIC Lift LM2 series is contactorless certified according to EN 81 1 1998 A3 2009 EN81 20 2014 and EN81 50
82. related Check that BRKE2 function is correctly set are missing Check that BRKS function is correctly set bbE BRKE signal error Check status of micro switch in brake 1 Check status of brake 1 and its power supply Check status of inverter input output related to brake l Check L84 time BRKE2 signal error Check status of micro switch in brake 2 Check status of brake and its power supply Check status of inverter input output related to brake 2 Check L84 time Because bbE alarm blocks the inverter according to UCM it cannot be reset following the standard procedure Additionally bbE alarm cannot be auto reset by the inverter H04 H05 neither can be 2 99 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 reset by switching OFF and ON inverter s power supply In order to reset the alarm following procedure has to be done 1 Push E key 2 Set parameter H95 to 111 Cursor can be moved by X keys 3 Push E key H95 is automatically set to 0 4 Push e key until main screen is shown In main screen bbE alarm is shown 5 Push amp 9 key 6 bbE alarm disappears from the display Note bbE alarm should be reset only after the cause of the alarm has been solved qj For additional information refer to related Application Note AN Lift2 0002v100EN Clear Alarm Data H97 deletes the information such as alarm history and data at the time of alarm occurrence including alarms that have occurred
83. resetting for alarm Tout 12 544 PWR 2 BBKkW During drive continuance alarm During standby mode Load factor being measured During rescue operation by brake control During battery operation Sub monitor Display type K15 specifies the LCD monitor display mode to be applied when the inverter using the multi function keypad is in Running mode GB Program Ment F Data for K15 Function Running status rotational direction and operation guide Bar charts for reference speed final output current and reference torque 2 195 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Sub Monitor 1 Display item selection Sub Monitor 2 Display item selection K16 and K17 specify the monitoring item to be displayed on the sub monitor 1 and 2 Data setting range 1 to 30 Function Item to be displayed m Unit Description selected Reference speed final Spd by C21 selected Reference speed pre ramp S Spd by C21 Motor speed Sync r min Elevator speed Lift m min Elevator speed mm s Lift mm s l Inverter output current expressed in Output current Iout A RMS A Inverter output voltage expressed in Output voltage Vout V RMS V Reference torque based on the 0 Calculated torque TRQ motor rated torque 1 Input power PWR kW Inverter s input power kW Torque in based on the motor rated 0 Reference torque TRQC torque being at 100
84. s Manual E Node ID y21 Set the node ID for CANopen communication The setting range is 1 to 127 E Baud rate y24 Sets the transmission baud rate for CAN communication 0 10 kbit s 1 20 kbit s 2 50 kbit s 3 125 kbit s 4 250 kbit s 5 500 kbit s 6 800 kbit s 7 1 Mbit s E User defined I O parameter 1 to 8 y25 y32 y25 to y28 Sets the inverter function code write tobe mapped to RPDO No 3 y29 to y32 Sets the inverter function code read tobe mapped to TPDO No 3 Specify the function code type and number in a 4 digit hexadecimal notation L Function code No refer to the description of function code y37 Function code type See the table below Group code Group code 0x02 2 0x1A 26 0x03 3 0x1B 27 0x04 4 0x1C 28 0x05 5 0x1D 29 0x06 6 OxIF 31 0x07 7 0x20 32 0x08 8 0x22 34 OxOB 11 0x23 35 0x0D 13 0x37 55 OxOF 15 0x38 56 0x10 16 0x39 57 0x11 17 0x3A 58 0x12 18 0x3B 59 0x17 23 0x3C 60 0x18 24 0x3D 61 0x19 25 E Operation selection y33 Sets the operation selection for CAN communication y33 data Function 0 Disable 1 CANopen CiA 402 Enable 2 132 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Communications error processing y34 Selects the behavior on CANopen communication error y34 data Function 0 Set the motor immediately in coast to stop mode and tri
85. specified by L88 Data setting range 0 00 to 6000 r min Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 E Door open delay time L88 L88 specifies the delay time from when the speed drops below the door open starting speed L87 until the DOPEN signal is turned ON Data setting range 0 0 to 10 0 s E Door open period L89 L89 specifies the period during which the DOPEN is kept ON Data setting range 0 1 to 30 0 s Door control When the reference speed final drops below the door open starting speed L87 during deceleration and the door open delay time L88 elapses the DOPEN is turned ON and kept ON during the door open period L89 L88 L89 Door control Door control Speed Dooropen Door open delay time period L87 Door control Door open starting speed Time Digital output DOPEN DEF Increasing the reference speed final above the speed L87 with the DOPEN being OFF activates the DOPEN ON process judgment If the reference speed final does not exceed the speed L87 the L88 and L89 specifications will be ignored so that the DOPEN will be kept OFF Decreasing the reference speed final from the speed exceeding the L87 down to less than the L87 activates the delay timer L88 After the delay time L88 elapses the DOPEN turns ON during the door open period L89 This door control applies to also the battery opera
86. speed command Anig R Analog speed command AnlgNR S Not reversible Reversible RS485 Chl Via RS485 communications link RS485 Ch Via RS 485 communications link port 1 Keypad port port 2 Terminal block Loader Via FRENIC Loader software CAN Via CAN communications link Jogging Jogging operation 3 3 4 Running stopping the motor In local mode pressing the 9 amp c key starts running the motor in the forward or reverse direction and pressing the key decelerates the motor to stop The 9 amp c key is enabled only in Running and Programming mode Forward Mote Reverse Figure 3 6 Rotational direction of motor Note The rotational direction of IEC compliant motor is opposite to the one shown here 3 4 Programming Mode 3 4 Programming Mode Programming mode allows the setting and confirmation of function codes and monitoring of maintenance related and input output I O terminal information as well as other functions A menu format is used to enable simple function selection The menu transition for programming mode is shown below 0 Quick Setup Refer to section 3 4 1 PRG gt O gt Running mode a F Fundamental Dspeed command Power ON b ERated speed LiBase speed or HRated voltage FjAcc dec time1 1 Start up Refer to section 3 4 2 Programming mod ae Hi ay indicat 1 Language ierarchy indicator x 2 App Select uick Setu H
87. ss rens etes estne ced or NN ox lo ioco insane psd diy cs OFF o 14 00000011 S NA E EA ox EA OFF ON OFF High speed 8 defined by C18 High speed 9 defined by C19 2 26 2 3 Overview of Function Code Sample combination of SS7 SS2 SS4 and SS8 states with reference speeds pre ramp To select zero speed by turning on SSJ for example configure a multistep speed command by setting SS 1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 and L11 to L18 as listed below m m c es Z O a O z Q Og m 02 ON High speed 2 defined by C12 High speed 3 defined by C13 High speed 4 defined by C14 High speed 5 defined by C15 High speed 6 defined by C16 High speed 7 defined by C17 High speed 8 defined by C18 High speed 9 defined by C19 Note Do not double assign the same data to L11 Zero Speed to L18 High Speed 1 Eight values are available ranging from 00000000 to 00000111 Double assignment results in a trip with alarm Er6 the moment a run command is entered Tip It is recommended that speeds from zero to high speed 1 are used for same operation thatn function code name To use any of them for different purposes confirm the setting ranges of its acceleration deceleration time and S curve acceleration deceleration time 2 27 Acceleration deceleration times to be applied when the reference speed pre ramp is changed after the reference speed
88. state If the protective function is activated more than the specified auto resetting times the inverter issues an alarm for any faults and does not attempt to escape the tripped state Data setting range 0 disable 1 to 10 times B Reset interval H05 H05 specifies the interval time to attempt performing auto resetting the tripped state Refer to the timing scheme diagram below Data setting range 0 5 to 20 0 s Operation timing scheme Reference Speed Run command f EGJIEEN NENNEN EE HOS H05 EN TFY E crs V l PE l RST i i OE H04 Auto reset Times REZ H04 gt reset times Auto resetting operation is not done The auto resetting operates by satisfying all of the following conditions The time of reset interval H05 passed after having generated the alarm The run command is OFF The auto resetting times are set value of Number of auto resetting times H04 or less The auto resetting times 1s reset by satisfying either of the following conditions The alarm was reset by manual operation The alarm was not generated within 24 hours Tip The auto resetting state can be monitored from the external equipment via a digital output terminal to which the TRY is assigned by setting 26 with E20 to E24 and E27 Note The auto resetting function is disabling while auto tuning or pole position offset tuning 2 87 Cooling Fan Control H06 specifie
89. supply terminals depend on inverter capacity FRN0032LM2A 4_ or below 24V 24V FRN0039LM2A 4 or above RO TO For additional information about external power supply terminals refer to Specifications documents BATRY must be turned ON E Specifications 1 Q G 4 5 6 7 The under voltage protection LU is disabled The inverter can run the elevator even in the under voltage condition The RDY Inverter ready to run signal is forced to go OFF The bypass contact of the charging circuit 73X ON delays a defined time T1 specified in table 1 from BATRY ON After that delay time it takes 0 1s T2 as the start waiting time After control power supply goes OFF battery power supply and control 200ms power supply turns ON The control power supply remains ON or after momentary power failure happens Table 1 Delay time from BATRY ON to 73X ON T1 During the battery operation if manual speed middle is selected if the L11 to L18 are default setting the terminal conditions are SSJ ON SS2 OFF SS4 OFF and SS8 OFF inverter runs the elevator at the speed specified by C03 Even if the analog speed command is selected and the manual speed middle is selected via general purpose digital input terminals inverter runs the elevator at the speed specified by C03 also When the multistep speed other than the manual speed middle is selected the inverter runs the elevator at the speed specified
90. the S curve operation the inverter decelerates in an S curve operation with L25 X 0 2 for the creep speed Speed High speed Kemp L30 Short floor operation Allowable speed Creep speed 7 i Zero speed M Time ai l L28 n OO s s o MEENRLINENN Zero speed High speed Creep speed Zero speed command command command command 2 142 2 3 Overview of Function Code Elevator Parameter Speed L31 specifies the elevator speed mm s relative to the inverter s rated speed F03 The elevator speed L31 can be calculated with the following equation L31 Maximum speed r min Detected speed r min X Elevator rated speed mm s Example If the elevator rated speed is 750 mm s the detected speed is 1350 r min and the maximum speed is 1800 r min L31 1800 1350 x 750 1000 mm s Data setting range 1 to 4000 mm s Note Changing the elevator parameter L31 requires modifying the data of other function codes Refer to section 2 2 Elevator Parameter Over speed protection level Setting over speed protection level If the speed of motor is exceeds the over speed protection level inverter will stop When there is no L32 protection level is constant 120 Data setting range 50 to 120 100 setting value of max speed Elevator Parameter Over speed timer Over speed timer L33 starts when the detection speed exceeds over speed level L32 After the timer ends
91. the inverter In following figure a speed diagram is shown with activation deactivation of these signals As soon as speed reaches L108 Encoder Rotation Detection speed FRUN or RRUN are activated depending on the rotation speed Speed detected 4 Tip In the case of torque vector control these signals will keep OFF state E Run command activated AX2 Function code data 55 This output signal comes ON by satisfying all of the following conditions Run command ON LU is OFF No alarm ALM is OFF This output signal comes OFF by satisfying either of the following conditions Run command OFF LU is ON Alarm ALM is ON E Motor overheat detected PTC THM Function code data 56 This output signal indicates that a temperature alarm condition has been detected by a PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor on the motor With this output signal assigned setting function code H26 PTC or NTC Thermistor to 2 enables the inverter to continue running instead of stopping with the alarm OH4 even if a temperature alarm condition has been detected For details of the PTC thermistor refer to the descriptions of function codes H26 and H27 PTC Thermistor Mode and Level E Brake control BRKS Function code data 57 This signal outputs a brake control command For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L80 to L84 Brake Control and H96 2 61 z deyo SHd09 NOILONN
92. the inverter stops When the detection speed decreases less than over speed level while the timer works the timer is reset and the inverter doesn t stop Data setting range 0 000 to 0 500 s Speed FWD OFF ALM 2 OFF L33 Speed F03x132 FWD OFF AM 2 143 c es Z O a O z Q Og m 02 L34 Elevator Parameter Moving distance in creepless operation L34 specifies the moving distance of an elevator cage in a creepless operation from its start to end Data setting range 0 0 to 6553 5 mm Creepless operation If a creepless operation is selected with the function codes listed below the inverter receives the position of the elevator cage at landing by an external command and generates a speed command pattern that moves the cage by the distance specified by L34 from the current position to land it Accordingly the creepless operation eliminates a creep required for general elevator control decreasing the landing time length Function code Name Data setting range Function 64 Start creepless Turning the associated operation terminal ON starts creepless CRPLS operation Command assignment to EOL tO EOP terminals X1 to X8 This code specifies the Elevator speed 1 to 4000 elevator speed relative to the inverter s maximum speed This code specifies the moving distance of an elevator cage in a creepless operation from its start
93. the running status of the inverter using the N Q key The information displayed is the same as for Menu 4 Alarm Information in Programming mode Refer to Section 3 4 5 1 Confirm Alarm History Pressing the te key while the running status information is displayed returns to the alarm code display FRENIC Lift Reference Manual First Edition June 2015 Fuji Electric Co Ltd The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual Fuji Electric Co Ltd URL http www fujielectric com
94. time when the system processes the communication errors For details on processing communication errors refer to y02 and y12 E Response interval time y09 y19 Sets a period from the time when the system receives a request from host equipment upper equipment such as computer or PLC until the time when it returns a response In case of the host equipments that are slow to process the task from completed transmission to completed reception preparation a timing can be synchronized by setting a response interval time Data setting range 0 00 to 1 00 s Host device Request Inverter Response T1 0 T1 Response interval time a a Processing time inside the inverter It varies depending on the timing and command For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual Note To set an inverter by the inverter supporting loader via the RS 485 communication consider the performance and condition of the computer and converter such as USB RS 485 converter Some converters monitor communication status and switch transmission and reception with timer B Protocol selection y10 y20 Selects a communication protocol y10 and y20 data Function 0 Modbus RTU protocol 1 FRENIC Loader protocol 2 Reserved for particular manufacturers 5 DCP protocol 2 131 z deyo S302 NOILONNA y21 to y37 Built in CANopen communication setting For details refer to the CAN Communication User
95. to end Moving distance in i 0 0 to 6553 5 creepless operation Requirements for creepless operation 1 The elevator system should be equipped with a device that accurately detects the position of an elevator cage or its equivalent device 2 The elevator system should be capable of applying signals issued from the detector stated in 1 above to the inverter as a Start creepless operation command CRPLS or be capable of modifying speed commands except zero speed to zero speed command 3 During deceleration that is after the start of deceleration the signal stated in 2 above can be applied to the inverter 4 The moving distance from the start of a creepless operation should be 6553 5 mm or less 5 The elevator speed calculated for L31 should be 4000 mm s or below 6 A multistep speed command with S curve operation should apply for speed control 2 144 2 3 Overview of Function Code Deceleration point programming and moving distance Creepless operation requires accurately programming the position of a deceleration point Given below is a programming method using the calculation result of the moving distance from the start of deceleration to a stop The moving distance from Deceleration to Stop in the speed pattern shown below is given by the following equation Note that N should be equal to or greater than the S curve zone N F03 x Sc 100 Sd 100 L CxV maxx Tdec Equa
96. with analog input When L54 0 assigning a reference torque bias to terminals 12 and V2 V2 function by function codes E61 and E63 inputs a torque bias with analog voltage input and assigning it to terminal V2 C1 function by E62 a torque bias with analog current input If no reference torque bias is assigned to any of terminals 12 and V2 however the analog torque bias is 0 96 Terminal commands TBI and TB2 assigned to the general purpose programmable input terminals by function codes E01 to E08 E98 and E99 are ignored When an analog torque bias is specified adjust the gain with L60 Driving gain and L61 Braking gain If L60 L61 100 analog input voltage 10 to 10 VDC corresponds to 100 to 100 of the motor rated torque and analog input current 4 to 20 mA corresponds to 0 to 100 of the motor rated torque assuming that gain 100 and offset 0 Balancing With the elevator being loaded with a counterweight adjust a torque bias amount to 0 relative to the input voltage of the load sensor This adjustment should be made when the elevator is stationary with a counterweight loaded and the brake being on Setting E43 data LED monitor to 19 monitors the torque bias balance adjustment value BTBB on the LED monitor For the multi function keypad press the key in Running mode and select a target monitor item Adjust the balance by adjusting analog input with C31 12 Offset C36 V2 C1 function
97. 0 No function assigned NONE 2 49 Function code data Terminal commands assigned Active ON Active OFF 101 1101 External alarm 2 102 1102 Start reference torque decreasing 103 1103 Inverter Output MC confirmation 108 1108 CAN Enable 111 1111 Check brake control 1 112 1112 Check brake control 2 114 1114 Enable rescue operation by means of brake control 115 1115 Short circuit control feedback 117 1117 Stand by mode Note Any negative logic Active OFF command cannot be assigned to the functions marked with in the Active OFF column The Enable external alarm trip and Force to decelerate are fail safe terminal commands For example when data 9 in Enable external alarm trip Active OFF alarm is triggered when OFF when data 1009 Active ON alarm is triggered when ON Terminal function assignment and data settin E Select multistep speed SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 Function code data 7 0 1 2 and 3 The combination of the ON OFF states of digital input signals S1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 selects one of 16 different frequency commands defined beforehand by 16 function codes C04 to C19 Multi frequency 0 to 15 With this the inverter can drive the motor at 16 different preset frequencies For details refer to the description of function code F01 Speed Command E Coast to a stop BX Function code data 7 Turning this terminal command ON
98. 0 Short floor setting 7 ration oper Allowable speed 12 Acceleration deceleration time 5 E13 Acceleration 4 deceleration time 6 L26 S curve setting 8 L28 S curve s Creep speed setting 10 Zero speed _p Time L19 S curve setting 1 DO L28 S curve x setting 10 n ON s MEN NNHNH s o0 M Zero speed High speed Creep speed Zero speed command command command command 2 141 In case of Reference speed final lt Allowable speed L30 and Holding time L29 OFF when a deceleration command is entered 1 Upon receipt of a deceleration command an S curve operation with L25 X 0 2 starts for finishing the current acceleration after reaching at L30 speed 2 After completion of the S curve operation the inverter decelerates in an S curve operation with L25 X 0 2 for the creep speed Speed High Speed cicanes tees ys eee tig Ee aye b reme L30 Short floor L25x02 ys L25x0 2 Allowabl speed Creep speed Zero speed Time LE L28 rn s MA s o Il s E Zero speed High speed Creep speed Zero speed command command command command In case of Reference speed final 2 Allowable speed L30 and Holding time L29 OFF when a deceleration command is entered 1 Upon receipt of a deceleration command an S curve operation with L25 X 0 2 starts for finishing the current acceleration immediately 2 After completion of
99. 0 to 10 00 s E MC control SW52 2 The table below lists the inverter running conditions and triggers required for turning the MC control signal SW52 2 ON or OFF The timing scheme is shown on the next page Current status SW52 2 ON retained SW52 2 OFF 1 When all of the following conditions are met turning a run command from OFF to ON turns the MC control signal Any of the following events with the MC control signal being ON turns the MC control signal OFF after the MC Except the conditions listed at left ON OFF delay time specified by L86 Coast to stop BX OFF Inverter main circuit output gate No trip from ON to OFF Terminal EN1 EN2 ON Run command from ON to OFF with Force to decelerate DRS OFF the inverter main circuit output gate being OFF 2 Any of the following events with a run command being ON turns the MC control signal ON Coast to stop BX from ON to OFF A trip that occurred is reset Terminal EN1 EN2 from OFF to ON Coast to stop BX from OFF to ON Atrip occurs Terminal EN1 EN2 from ON to OFF Force to decelerate DRS from OFF to ON below the stop speed When the conflicting conditions are present e g from ON to OFF conditions and from OFF to ON conditions the latter event has priority The BX and EN1 EN2 are in normal logic The Force to decelerate state is kept from the entry of a DRS command unti
100. 00 V class 500 V Output torque Motor shaft torque Twice the rated motor torque Actual speed Speed detected through the PG interface Maximum speed as 100 DC link bus voltage DC link bus voltage of the inverter 200 V class 500 V 400 V class 1000 V Universal AO Command from communication EDI RS 485 communication user manual 20 000 100 Calibration For meter calibration Full scale output Always full scale equivalent to 100 Output Inverter heat sink temperature Inverter internal temperature Customizable logic output signal 1 Customizable logic output signal 2 Customizable logic output signal 3 Customizable logic output signal 4 Customizable logic output signal 5 Customizable logic output signal 6 Customizable logic output signal 7 Customizable logic output signal 8 Customizable logic output signal 9 Customizable logic output signal 10 F42 selects the control mode Control Mode Data for F42 Heat sink detection temperature of inverter Internal detection temperature of inverter Enable only at analog output Enable only at analog output Enable only at analog output Enable only at analog output Enable only at analog output Enable only at analog output Enable only at analog output Enable only at analog output Enable only at analog output Enable only at analog output Function 200 C 100 200 C 100 100
101. 04 Input 1 gt U05 Input Output ON U04 Output U05 Input 2 With Input 1 gt U04 Input 1 lt U05 Output OFF 2101 High selector 2102 Low selector 1 With U04 gt Input 1 gt U05 Input Output ON U04 Output U05 Input 2 With Input 1 2 U04 U05 Input 1 Output OFF 2103 Average of inputs Input 1 Input 2 Input 1 output when Input 1 2 Input 2 U04 SL utput 2 053 Input 2 output when Input 1 Input 2 Input 1 output Input 1 when Input 1 lt Input 2 ERE U04 Low output selector 4 4 uo5 Input 2 Input 2 output when Input 1 gt Input 2 Input 1 Input 2 2 output Input 1 3 N U04 7 Average Output operation U05 Input 2 2 117 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA B inputs 1 and 2 U02 U03 etc Analog The following signals are available as analog input signals Data Selectable Signals 8000 General purpose analog output signal same as signals selected in F31 output ib a uut 1 output current output torque Input power DC link bus voltage etc Example For output frequency 1 maximum frequency 100 is input as 100 00 BS Example For output current 200 of the inverter rated current is input 100 00 Note 10 Universal AO is not available 2001 to 2200 Output of step 1 to 200 SO001 to SO200
102. 1 Start up 1 Data Set 2 Data Check 3 Changed Data Data Copy 4 Alarm Info 5 Initialize 2jFunction Code 3 INV Info Protection status Model name of stored data S Spd 1450r min S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 2 gt 4 e PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 1 XJKP INV LWrite 2 INV KP Read 3 KP INV Write 4 KP INV Verify 5 KP Data Check 5 User Confi EINEN qc Function Code Select a target menu item by using A Q keys Data Cop a gt Select a target operation by using eI keys Then press key Select a target memory slot by using NO keys Then press key Then press key Model name of target inverter S Spd 1450r min S Spd 1450r min S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 1 e PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 1 2 PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 1 S Inverter initializes all of function code data to factory default Inverter reads function code data from keypad and writes internal memory Percentage of progress is shown in bottom CL means that it is processing customizable logic settings After final confirmation press key to start copying operation After initialization inverter moves Write operation automatically S Spd 1450r min S Spd 1450r nin S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 1 n PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 1 t PRG gt 2 gt 4 gt 1 KP15 0019LM2 4 KP15 0019LM2 4 Inverter verifies function code data between itself and keypad Percentage of progress is shown in bottom CL means that it is processing customizable logic settings
103. 128 cune settin Zero speed L19 S curve setting 1 oS 9 Time Zero speed High speed command command FWD ON SS2 Brake Release Maximum speed Acceleration time Creepless operatiori Acceleration 77 Maximum speed 7 Deceleration time M Jerk E pe a Example of Creepless Operation without CRPLS Improving the landing position accuracy in a creepless operation Observing the following rules improves the landing position accuracy including the repeatability in a creepless operation 1 When using a multistep speed command to change the reference speed pre ramp to zero speed lessen the number of terminals which should be switched Changing the setting of only a single terminal for changing the reference speed pre ramp can suppress the fluctuation of signals issued from the host controller improving the stopping accuracy For that purpose use L11 Zero speed to L18 High speed 2 Use the multistep speed command agreement timer E19 for multistep speed commands 3 Specify the filter time constant for reference speed final L09 as small as possible It is however not necessary to specify the value smaller than the factory default Increasing the filter time constant makes the actual moving distance to a stop longer than the one specified by L34 Moving distance in creepless operation If such is necessary therefore increase the L34 data to adjust the landing position In this case it is d
104. 2 Contents 1 1 Symbols Used inside the Block Diagrams and their meanings sesssssseeeeeenene 1 1 1 2 Reference Speed pre ramp Command Generator eene enne 1 2 1 3 Reference Torque Command Generator sese eee nnne 1 3 L4 Drive Command Controller 5 ee A E etre cette dede d eee ette edet 1 4 91901 10H1NOO YO4 SWVYOVIG Y00709 MESE 1 1 Symbols Used inside the Block Diagrams and their meanings FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters for lifting machines such as elevators are equipped with a number of function codes to match a variety of motor operations required in your system Refer to Chapter 2 FUNCTION CODES for details of the function codes The function codes have functional relationship to each other Several special function codes also work with execution priority each other depending on their functions or data settings This chapter explains the main block diagrams for control logic in the inverter You are requested to fully understand the inverter s control logic together with the function codes in order to specify the function code data correctly The block diagrams contained in this chapter show only function codes having mutual relationship For the function codes that work independently and for detailed explanation of each function code refer to Chapter 2 FUNCTION CODES 1 4 Symbols Used inside the Block Diagrams and their meanings Table 1 1 lists symbols commonly used in
105. 2 Hysteresis 0 00 to 900 0 Equivalent with 0 00 to 30 00 Hz Variable v a E34 Current Detection 1 ID When you set 1 to L98 bitO E34 and E35 are effective over torque current alarm iL Level 1 0 00 Disable Variable YT Y2 Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter rated current E36 Speed Detection 2 FDT2 E37 Current Detection 2 ID2 Refer to Level 2 0 00 Disable Variable Y1Y2 default 19 Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter rated current table E39 Recommended running direction RRD Detection level O to 100 E43 LED Monitor z deyo S302 NOILONNA 0 Speed monitor Select by E48 3 Output current 4 Output voltage 8 Calculated torque 9 Input power 18 Reference torque 19 Torque bias balance adjustment Offset BTBB 20 Torque bias gain adjustment BTBG E45 gesewed ooo e o Y E46 E47 E48 Speed monitor item 0 Reference speed final 2 Reference speed pre ramp 3 Motor speed 5 Elevator speed 8 Elevator speed mm s E61 Analog Input for Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to Extension function terminals 12 C1 and V2 as listed below selection E62 E63 0 None 1 Speed command Not reversible operation with polarity 2 Speed command Reversible operation with polarity Nothing for C1 4 Torque bias command E98 Command Assignment to E99 Run forward Run reverse 1 The data setting range is va
106. 9LM2A 4_ 7 50 kW 18 50 A 9 80 A 4 23 96 13 01 FRNOO25LM2A 4_ 11 00 kW 24 50 A 13 90 A 3 22 12 27 96 FRN0032LM2A 4 15 00 kW 32 00 A 17 90 A 2 55 96 11 47 96 FRNOO39LM2A 4_ 18 50 kW 37 00 A 16 20 A 1 98 11 97 FRNOO45LM2A 4_ 22 00 kW 45 00 A 19 00 A 2 11 12 35 FRNOO11LM2A 7_ 2 20 kW 11 00 A 7 20 A 6 82 96 9 91 96 FRNOO18LM2A 7_ 3 70 kW 18 00 A 11 40 A 5 54 96 8 33 96 2 21 z deyo S302 NOILONNA 2 2 Before setting the function code ANCAUTION Set the function code in following order Otherwise a different value might be set 1 C21 Speed Command Unit should be set The speed can be specified by the corresponding unit C21 data Speed Command Unit Referred function code r min P01 m min P01 F03 L31 None P01 F03 L31 2 POI Motor Number of poles should be set 3 F03 Rated Speed and L31 Elevator Parameter Speed should be set Tip F03 Rated speed depends on P01 motor number of poles Set the date of F03 again when you change P01 For details refer to the descriptions of function codes F03 Changing any data of C21 P01 F03 and L31 requires modifying the data of the function codes listed below again Inverter Inverter Function code Name internal value Function code Name internal value Hz Hz F04 Base Speed 1 00 to 200 0 C03 Battery Operation Sp
107. A E Speed existence DNZS Function code data 70 This output signal comes ON when the detected speed is equal to or higher than the stop speed It is not affected by any run command to the inverter E Speed agreement DSAG Function code data 71 This output signal comes ON when the difference between reference speed final and detected speed is within the range specified by H74 and it goes OFF when the difference is out of the allowable band for the time longer than the one specified by H75 It is not affected by any run command to the inverter For details refer to the description of function codes H74 and H75 Speed Agreement E Speed arrival 3 FAR3 Function code data 72 This output signal comes ON when the difference between the detected speed and reference speed pre ramp comes within the allowable error zone specified by E30 It is not affected by any run command to the inverter For details refer to the description of function code E30 Speed Arrival E During acceleration and During deceleration DACC and DDEC Function code data 73 and 74 The output signal DACC or DDEC come ON depending on whether the motor is accelerating or decelerating by comparing the reference speed pre ramp with the detected speed These output signals are not affected by any run command to the inverter For details refer to the description of function code E30 Speed Arrival B During zero speed DZR Function
108. Cursor Blinking grues P eds 3 Disp Setting Move the cursor with AlOkeys to select SIVE Sons 2 Function code Refer to section 3 4 3 the target men 4 Alarm Info le RN d PRG gt 2 5 User Config 1 Data Set 6 Tools 2 Data Check 3 Changed Data 4 Data Copy 5 Initialize 3 INV Info Refer to section 3 4 4 PRG gt 3 1 0p Monitor 2 1 0 Check 3 Maintenance 4 Unit Info 5 Travel Counter 4 Alarm Info D Refer to section 3 4 5 PRG gt 4 1 Alarm Histor 5 User Config Refer to section 3 4 6 PRG gt S 1 Select Q Setup 6 Tools _ Refer to section 3 4 7 PRG gt 6 1 Clogic Monitor 2 Load Factor 3 COM Debug Figure 3 7 Menus transition in Programming mode B Hierarchy indicator The hierarchical structure for each screen is indicated in order to let you know where you are For example if you see Alarm history screen this indicator shows as PRG gt 4 gt 1 Additionally this indicator might show page number function code number alarm code or etc with corresponding to each situations 3 9 deu uC T IV d L SNISN NOILV HSdO Table 3 7 Menus available in Programming mode Main Menu Sub Menu Hierarchy indicator Principal Functions 0 Quick Setup Shows only frequently used function codes 1 Start up PRG gt 0 Sets functions for initial settings 1 Language PRG gt 1 gt 1 Sets l
109. Diagrams and their meanings sse 1 1 1 2 Reference Speed pre ramp Command Generator essen 1 2 1 3 Reference Torque Command Generator esses eere 1 3 LA Drive Command Controller irn e IH De HERR ea ae ned tees 1 4 Chapter 2 FUNCTION CODES 2 l 4 Euncton Code Tables nee ee e Uere etii 2 1 223 Betore setting the function code ues sse seed tede tie ede d Ae dudes 2 22 2 3 Overview ot E nction Codes eee REDE ER Ute on ELS 2 23 23 1 F codes Fundamental functions 5 rere ERE FER TIST HE eee E ae ue THES 2 24 2 3 2 E codes Extension terminal functions nennen enne ener enne 2 49 2 3 3 C codes Control f nctlons cte Roe CRIT D Ee SIR SIE Re egeat etit 2 75 23 4 P codes Motor parameters esee eoe e A D TE D DE Pe re HR e dete 2 83 2 3 5 H codes High performance functions sess 2 87 2 3 6 U codes Customizable logic operation enne 2 106 2 3 y codes Link functions cec eie tient eee tte ee e RR Rt Deed te ds 2 131 2 3 8 Ly codes Lift functions oce e Reo ee e e eR ERR erede M tenen CO ub ewes 2 138 2 3 9 K codes Keypad functions necesite cede ne EL Here E i 2 196 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING TP A1 LM2 3 1 LCD monitor keys and LED indicators on the keypad sse 3 1 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes sss eeenenee ener enne nn nennen nennen nnne nennen 3 5 33 RunningMode ce oce suec uide e e e eee
110. E31 or E36 The output signal FDT or FDT2 is turned ON when the detected speed has exceeded the speed detection level specified by E31 or E36 Data setting range 0 00 to 6000 r min LL Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 E Speed detection hysteresis E32 The FDT is turned OFF when the detected speed has lowered below the Detection level E31 or E36 Hysteresis band width E32 Data setting range 0 00 to 900 r min __ Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 E Speed detection Setting any of E20 to E24 and E27 data to 2 assigns the output signal FDT or 31 assigns the output signal FDT2 to the specified general purpose programmable output terminal The FDT comes ON when the detected speed has exceeded the speed detection level E31 or E36 It goes OFF when the detected speed has lowered below the Detection level E31 or E36 Hysteresis band width E32 Note Reference speed is used for detection speed to change when the torque vector is control is used Detected speed Detection level Hysteresis FDT Time 2 68 2 3 Overview of Function Code Current Detection 1 Level 1 e Current Detection 1 Time LL Refer to the description of E37 Speed Detection 2 FDT Detection level refer to E31 LL Refer to the description of E31 Curre
111. EE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEN SW52 2 ree ees Output gate MENEENNNEENEEEEEC NEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEN X 9 L85 H64 H65 F24 2 42 2 3 Overview of Function Code ii When an analog speed command Not reversible is enabled F01 1 As soon as run command is ON DC braking operation starts After the DC braking operation the inverter activates a soft start to the starting speed After H64 timer is elapsed inverter accelerates the motor up to starting speed F23 by means of soft start acceleration ramp H65 When the reference speed pre ramp exceeds the starting speed the inverter immediately accelerates from the current zh speed up to the reference speed pre ramp E O d Speed 9 Q O iu m 05 Reference Speed Se DC K 3 Starting Speed 7 aid nie 0 FWD 3522 EEEEENEEEEEEEEENO crs Output Gate Oo S K 5 amp L85 H64 H65 iii When an analog speed command Reversible is enabled F01 2 During this operation no DC braking neither soft start operations are available When the reference speed pre ramp exceeds the starting speed the inverter starts acceleration from starting speed to the reference speed pre ramp Speed pee Reference Speed Analog speed command Starting Speed cm 0 E e FWD ON SW52 2 ON Output Gate ON EA L85 2 43 Stop Speed H66 Stop Speed Detection method H67 Stop Speed Holding time F25 H66 and H67 specify the stop speed
112. EEEEEEEEREKRKEEEREMERKEMEMN T4 iT2 UPS batteries operation allowable zone DC link bus voltage Edc A 1 Undervoltage level L125 UPS batteries minimum operation level gt EISE arrester UP earns era xe eraut A eee Output Frequency C03 Battery UPS operation speed 0 FWD pu Alarm LU Figure 2 Rescue operation sequence when DC link lt L125 As it can be observed Main supply is gone for any reason At this point power supply is changed from mains to batteries or UPS by means of MC1 and MC2 When MC2 is closed voltage increases on DC Link This voltage reaches L125 level but after few minutes it goes below for any reason When inverter and controller are ready to perform rescue operation it cannot starts as DC link voltage level is below L125 At this point inverter trips LV alarm L130 Sheave diameter Ds L131 Encoder diameter De L132 Theta compensation band L133 Theta compensation gain lower limiter FRENIC Lift LM2A series includes the motor control Vector control with peripheral PG Synchronous motor FRENIC Lift is able to control PMS motors with incremental encoder even encoder is not installed in the centre of the shaft E Sheave diameter Ds L130 Set the motor sheave diameter in mm in this parameter E Encoder diameter De L131 Set the encoder sheave diameter E Theta compensation band L132 Theta co
113. Emergency stop timing sequence In figure 3 a starting sequence with feedback contacts timing problem is shown Speed 0 Run command FWD REV m 8 SCCF BN BRKS _ scc PON Short circuit contact IGBT s gate i Inverter trips SCA Figure 3 Starting sequence with feedback contacts timing problem SCA alarm As it can be observed inverter waits L121 time in order to receive SCCF signal contact feedback When L121 time finished no feedback is received from shor circuit contacts therefore inverter trips SCA alarm At same time because constant feedback is not received IGBT s drivers are not activated and SCC output signal goes to OFF state 2 184 2 3 Overview of Function Code In figure 4 a stopping sequence with feedback contacts timing problem is shown Speed High speed 3 Creep speed Stop speed F25 4 B 0 T f T 7 gt EN1 amp EN2 Run command FWD REV SCCF scc Short circuit contact 9 IGBT s gate Alarm bod EM ED r i 1 RN i i Ee LEV L120 H67 L56 L86 L120 Inverter trips SCA Figure 4 Stopping sequence with feedback contact timing problem SCA alarm After time L121 is elapsed because SCCF input feedback has not changed its status SCA alarm is issued In fig
114. FO Fuji Electric Innovating Energy Technology FRENIC Lift Reference Manual INR SIA7 1909 E Copyright O 2015 Fuji Electric Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement The purpose of this manual is to provide accurate information in handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual Preface This manual provides the roles of function codes available for the FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters their overview lists and details of each function code Carefully read this manual for proper use Incorrect handling of the inverter may prevent the inverter and or related equipment from operating correctly shorten their lives or cause problems The table below lists the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC Lift LM2 Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary
115. GBT sgate or 000 ory Alarm M aa M ON 1 E f Tw es k gt Inverter trips any L120 L82 L86 alarm Figure 6 Inverter in alarm AZM output function ON Case 2 RBRK input function is ON Figure 7 shows the case of rescue operation by brake control In this case motor phases short circuit can be performed in order to avoid that motor accelerates too fast As it can be observed as soon as rescue operation by brake control starts RBRK is ON function SCC turns to OFF short circuit is applied Contacts feedback is received after the mechanical delay of the power relay or mini contactor Brake will not be opened before timer L82 is elapsed This is in order to avoid that motor brake opens when short circuit 1s not done in other words it avoids that contacts closed while motor is already generating energy For a similar reason when rescue operation by brake control finishes RBRK is OFF SCC will not be turned ON until timer L86 is elapsed By means of this short circuit will be applied when motors brake is applied motor not generating Speed 0 Run command or FWD REV sccr WERKEN RBrk BRKE MENU BRKS L EIER SCC Short circuit contact CHEN IGBT s gate OFF ALM OFF 1 i CLOSED if lt 182 gt lt L86 gt Figure 7 Rescue operation by brake control Case 3 BRKE BRKEI or BRKE2 input functions are ON and BRKS output function is OFF
116. General purpose timer Increment counter Decrement counter Input 29 1 Ir Output Input 1 Output Input 1 Output Qo A E E Oo Count cleared Count initialized Input 2 Input 2 Input 2 Data 130 Timer with reset input ON Timer Input 1 i Output Input 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Input 2 OFF ON OFF Reset Output OFF ON loFF ON OFF ON OFF Input 2 Timer va o Time setting 2 110 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Operation of general purpose timer Digital The operation schemes for individual timers are shown below End 1 On delay timer End 2 Off delay timer Input OFF ON OFF ON OFF Input OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Br Output or d ON OFF Output QE ON OFF ON Cc Z O d o Zz Q Timer Timer gt Sa m Time setting value Time setting value 05 End 3 One shot pulse output End 4 Retriggerable timer i OFF ON OFF OFF ici OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFI ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF Output Output Timer Timer _ _ Time setting value Time setting value Equal or less than time setting value Time setting value End 5 Pulse train output FF o OFF N Coon on ol Input OFF ON OFF Output ON Timer VA Time setting value OFF 2 111 E Inputs 1 and 2 U02 U03 etc Digital The following digital signals are available as input signals Value in is in n
117. Indication of LED Indicators LED Indicators Indication oO Shows the inverter running state STATUS Flashing Green No run command input Inverter stopped E WARN Yellow A light alarm has occurred But inverter can continue running e heavy alarm No heavy alarm has occurred Flashing A heavy alarm has occurred Inverter shuts off its output 3 1 deu uC T IV d L 9NISQ NOI LV HSdO Table 3 2 Overview of Keypad Functions Keys Functions This key switches the operation modes between Running mode Alarm mode and Programming mode Reset key which works as follows according to the operation modes E In Running mode This key cancels the screen transition W In Programming mode This key discards the settings being configured and cancels the screen transition W In Alarm mode This key resets the alarm states and switches to Programming mode UP DOWN key which works as follows according to the operation modes W In Running mode These keys switch to the digital reference speed when local mode W In Programming mode These keys select menu items change data and scroll the screen W In Alarm mode These keys display multiple alarms and alarm history These keys move the cursor to the digit of data to be modified shift the setting item and switch the screen Set key which works as follows according to the operation modes E In Running mode Pressing this
118. K codes Keypad functions oe ERR ORE RR RE ERR nett A ee 2 194 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 2 4 Function Code Tables 2 1 Function Code Tables Function codes enable the FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters to be set up to match your system requirements z deyo Each function code consists of a 3 letter alphanumeric string The first letter is an alphabet that identifies its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the group The function codes are classified into nine groups Fundamental Functions F codes Extension Terminal Functions E codes Control Functions C codes Motor Parameters P codes High Performance Functions H codes and H1 codes Customizable logic operation U codes and U1 codes Link Functions y codes Lift Functions L codes L1 codes and L2 codes and Keypad Functions K codes To determine the property of each function code set data to the function code The following descriptions supplement those given in the function code tables on page 2 3 and subsequent pages 3002 NOILONNA B Changing validating and saving function code data when the inverter is running Function codes are indicated with the following notations based on whether they can be changed or not when the inverter 1s running Notation Change when running Validating and saving function code data Possible If the data of the codes marked with Y is changed with N O
119. L144 timer is elapsed because torque is between levels L146 and L147 output function LCF is going to ON state This is understood as full load inside the car LCF is kept to ON until current torque is completely removed from the motor When current is removed from the motor it is understood that travel is finished LCF signal will go to OFF when travel is finished E Load cell function LCO detection level L147 Torque level set on this parameter will be understood as torque needed to keep zero speed when car is in overload In order to set L136 correctly please check torque at zero speed when maximum load allowed is inside car after rollback is compensated Speed 4 mm s Torque 9 A L147 EN amp EN2 MENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE eS Run command fe FWD REV L BRKS Mechanical brake _ NENENENEEEEEEEEEEE r LCO i Sagal i L144 Figure 3 Overload detection level ECO As it can be observed as soon as BRKS signal goes to ON L144 timer starts to count On the other hand as soon as mechanical brake opens torque output current increases but some time is needed to stabilize torque at zero speed When L144 timer is elapsed because torque is over L147 level output function LCO is going to ON state This is understood as full load inside the car LCO is kept to ON until current torque is completely removed from the motor When current is removed from the motor it is und
120. Offset or C41 V2 V2 function Offset so that the monitored data comes to 0 The monitored data shows the ratio to the motor rating torque in percentages Gain adjustment 1 The gain adjustment should follow the balance adjustment Before proceeding to the gain adjustment set analog input with C32 12 Gain C37 V2 C1 function Gain or C42 V2 V2 function Gain to 100 96 2 According to the table below determine the initial values of the gains at the driving and braking sides L60 and L61 Function codes to be set with no load Motor rotational When the load increases the analog Initial values of direction when the voltage current input load sensor L60 and L61 elevator lifts up will data UP DOWN Increase 100 96 Forward L61 L60 Decrease 100 96 Increase 100 96 Decrease 100 96 Reverse 3 Setting E43 data LED monitor to 20 monitors the torque bias gain adjustment value BTBG on the LED monitor For the multi function keypad press the key in Running mode and select a target monitor item 4 With no load run the elevator up at a speed of 2 to 1096 of the elevator rated speed Adjust L61 and L60 data in the forward and reverse direction respectively so that the monitored data comes to approximately 0 when the speed is stabilized The monitored data shows the ratio to the motor rating torque in percentages 5 With no load run the elevat
121. Pulse Term X P1 Z1 P2 22 Figure 3 15 Screen transition for I O Check display sample 3 22 3 4 4 3 3 4 Programming Mode View Maintenance Information Maintenance PRG gt 3 gt 3 Displays information needed for inverter maintenance Table 3 13 Display items in Maintenance Category Details Shows cumulative time inverter s main power has been on Cumulative run time Time Reverts to 0 after exceeding 65 535 hours and begins counting up again DC link bus voltage Edc Shows DC link bus voltage of inverter s main circuit 1 Maximum effective I Shows as the effective value the maximum inverter output current current value ee each hour Shows cumulative power level Reverts to 0 after passing Cumulative power level Wh 1 000 000 kWh Number ot smit mom Accumulates and shows the number of motor operations the gate on 8 G On number of times the inverter run command has been ON The re number 1 00 means 10000 Nabet ae P On Shows the total amount of number the inverter has been turned P P power on The number 1 00 means 10000 2 Shows the total amount of time the cooling fan has been in Powered life of cooling fan EneT operation Time when the cooling fan ON OFF control function code H06 is enabled and the cooling fan is off is not counted Shows the cooling fan s remaining service life Remaining life is Target life of cooling fan Life calculated by subtracting elapsed t
122. SUN Output k Z N b U04 U05 U05 Abs Oulu Operation U05 N Input 2 Input 2 Input 2 2007 Inverting adder 2009 Linear function Input 1 IA Output 2 Input 2 U04 1 U05 Input 1 Output Input 2 KA X Input 1 KB U04 U05 2051 Comparator 1 2052 Comparator 2 With Input 1 Input 2 gt U04 U05 Input 1 Output ON Output Input 2 With Input 1 Input 2 U04 U05 Output OFF With Input 1 Input 2 gt U04 UO5 Input 1 Output ON Output Input 2 With Input 1 Input 2 U04 UO5 Output OFF 2053 Comparator 3 With Input 1 Input 2 gt U04 U05 Input 1 Output ON Output Input 2 With Input 1 Input 2 U04 U05 Output OFF ON is prioritized when both conditions are satisfied 2054 Comparator 4 With Input 1 Input 2 gt U04 UO5 Input 1 Output ON Output Input 2 With Input 1 Input 2 U04 U05 Output OFF 2055 Comparator 5 Input 1 Output ON when Input 1 2 U04 Output U04 Output OFF when Input 1 lt U04 U05 ON is prioritized when both conditions are satisfied 2 116 2056 Comparator 6 2071 Window comparator 1 2 3 Overview of Function Code 2072 Window comparator 2 Input 1 With Input 1 lt U04 Output ON Output With Input 1 gt U04 U05 Output OFF 1 With U
123. U05 and other related function codes specify the general purpose timer period or the increment decrement counter value z deyo Function Description Timer The period is specified in seconds 0 00 to 600 00 The specified value is multiplied by 100 times Counter value If 0 01 is specified it is converted to 1 9990 00 to 0 01 The timer or counter value works as 0 00 No timer 601 00 to 9990 00 The period is specified in seconds S302 NOILONNA Input analog Block function code setting B Block selection function 1 function 2 U01 U04 U05 etc Analog The following items are available as operation function block Note that if the upper and lower limits have the same value there are no upper and lower limits Block f Function Function Or Tun on Description 1 U04 2 U05 etc etc etc No function This function always outputs 0 Not Not assigned False OFF required required Adder Addition function with two inputs input 1 and Upper Lower input 2 limit limit This function has output limiters upper lower specified with two function codes The Ist function code provides upper limit value and the 2nd one provides lower limit value Subtracter Subtraction function with two inputs input 1 and input 2 This function has output limiters upper lower specified with two function codes The Ist function code provides upper limit value and the 2nd one provides lower limit value Mul
124. U175 Customizable logic Storage area 1 to 5 U190 to U195 Customizable logic Step 15 to 200 setting E Customizable Logic Mode selection U00 U00 specifies whether to enable the sequence configured with the customizable logic function or disable it to run the inverter only via its input terminals or others UOO data Function Disable Enable Customizable logic operation The ECL alarm occurs when changing U00 from 1 to 0 during operation E Customizable Logic Mode Setting U01 to U70 U190 to U195 In the customizable logic the steps are categorized in the following three types Input digital Block selection U01 U06 U11 etc 1 to 1999 Input 1 digital O 3 General Logic circuit Snera Output digital Input 2 digital O 3 purpose timer Time setting Input analog Block selection U01 U06 U11 etc 2001 to 3999 Input 1 analog O 4 Operation Nine ene circuit O Output analog digital Input digital analog Block selection U01 U06 U11 etc 4001 to 5999 Operation ix ns j i T e Input 2 digital 2 106 2 3 Overview of Function Code The function code settings for each step are as follows Step 1 to 14 Block selection Function 1 Function 2 Output e Step 1 U01 U02 U03 U04 U05 S0001 to 1999 Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Time setti
125. UIIE EIET EIERE ru ce s o s DL Ue Nr so de NALE P e EE i L112 ord ec E E E Pa i L113 0 L113 0 L113 1 L113 1 L113 2 L113 3 Figure 1 Basic function time chart of TDC function E Travel direction counter Total number of direction changes L114 This is an ONLY READ function code It shows the total number of direction changes When running direction is changed from FWD to REV or from REV to FWD this counter is increased This parameter cannot be modified in order to detect 1f TDC function is used propertly In other words if total number of direction changes direction canges limit and total number of resets doesn t match it means that somebody is manipulating intentionally the inverter in order to avoid changing suspension means Therefore by means of this counter sabotage can be detected Monitoring range is from 0 01 10 00 Million direction changes where 0 01 are 10 000 changes and 10 00 are 10 000 000 changes E Travel direction counter Total number of resets L115 This is an ONLY READ function code It shows the total number of reset operations This counter increments one unit each time that parameter L113 is modified qj For additional information about TDC function refer to related Application Note AN Lift2 0004v100EN L117 Rescue operation by brake control Speed limit L118 Rescue operation by brake control Apply time L119 Rescue operation by brake control Speed detection delay time When th
126. Vector control with PG 500ms L82 Setting speed Starting speed 0 Reference speed Starting speed 0 1Hz EN Run command SW52 2 Gate RUN Output phase loss detection BRKS 0 l paum F24 H64 X95 Ke 500ms L82 Torque Vector control Setting speed Starting speed 0 Reference speed Starting speed 0 1Hz 0 EN Run command SW52 2 Gate RUN Output phase loss detection BRKS T ON kx 500ms L82 orque Vector control E Select life judgment criteria of DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 H98 allows you to select the criteria for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor s reservoir capacitor s between factory default setting and your own choice Note Before specifying the criteria of your own choice measure and confirm the reference level in advance For details refer to the FRENIC Lift LM2 Instruction Manual INR SI47 1894 E Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 2 102 2 3 Overview of Function Code B Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Whether the DC link bus capacitor reservoir capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of time for discharging after power off The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter Therefore if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly
127. a altogether into another inverter deu b Copying the function code data saved in the inverter memory into the keypad memory for backup c Saving function code data in the keypad as master data for data management that 1s saving more than one set of function code data in the keypad and writing a set of data suited to the machinery into the target inverter Inverter Keypad uC T LV d L 9NISQ NOI LV HSdO a Copy b Backup c Data management The following functions can be made to sub menu numbers to 5 Table 3 9 Operations available in copying function code data Sub Menu Sub Menu Description I Write Write data with Performs inverter initialization data writing and verifying verification after initialization automatically Read Read data Reads out function code data from the inverter memory and stores it into the keypad memory Write Write data Writes the data held in the selected area of the keypad memory into the target inverter memory Verify Verify data Verifies the data held in the keypad memory against that in the inverter memory Check Check copied data in the Shows the model info type and function code data of three sets keypad of data stored in the keypad memory The example below shows screen transition in the case of I Write operation Read Write and Verify operations are similar S Spd 1450r nin PRG v PRG gt 2 0 Quick Setup
128. ackout time 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Brightness control Set backlight brightness Contrast Set contrast Shortcut Q Set shortcut destination for G o key jump directly to registered Shortcut o menu screen from Running mode screen 3 12 3 4 Programming Mode 3 4 3 Function Codes PRG gt 2 Function code data settings and changes including copying and initializing data can be made via programming mode menu number 2 Function Code I9 gt D 3 4 3 1 Setting up function code data Data Set w PRG gt 2 gt 1 Q This section explains how to set function code data u gt The examples below show how to change F03 Rated speed from 1450 r min to 1800 r min o z c o S Spd 1450r nin S Spd 1450r min S Spd 1450r nin e PRG v PRG gt 2 PRG gt 2 gt 1 s PRG gt 2 gt 1 C 4 0 Quick Setup 1jData Set F Fundamental U 1 Start up 2 Data Check E Extension Data protection 2 Z2 Function Code 3 Changed Data C Control speed command 1 3 INV Info 4 Data Copy P Motor Param O3Rated speed gt 4 Alarm Info 5 Initialize H High Perform ZBase speed N 5 User Confi H1 High Perform Rated voltage z zm pa Data Set E G Ope A O gt Ope Select a target menu item by using AIC keys Select a target function code Select a target function code group by using WIO keys by using v QO keys Then press key nd d Changed marker then press key Then press key shows the data cha
129. al input Reversal on short circuit no reversal when open FWD REV XI X8 XF XR RST Communications port input signal Input information on communication specific function code S06 Reversal on 1 no reversal on 0 Y1 Y2 Y3A Y5A 30ABC Output signal Output signal information 12 Terminal 12 input voltage CI Analog input signal Terminal C1 input current Terminal V2 input voltage Terminal PTC input voltage Terminal FMA output voltage output current Output electrical angle deg el Phase angle Magnetic pole position detection angle deg mech Only displayed with PMPG option Detected mechanical angle deg mech Magnetic pole position detection signal in binary Only displayed with PMPG option S Spd 1450r nin PRG 3 2 1 6 v Di Orwo x1 LInev x2 mx 0x4 O xs S Spd 1450r nin PRG gt 3 gt 2 4 6 Ai Ao 12 c v2 PTC FM1 Vo 10 6v Encoder pulse rate for A B phase kPulse s Encoder pulse PRG gt 3 gt 2 2 6 Di Link Orwo Cx Orev 0x2 0x3 0x4 xs Oxs Wen Dx Wen Oxs 181CH PRG gt 3 gt 2 5 6 Theta Ge Ore On ppb 0 0v 0 0v 304 deg 0 deg 30255 0000 0 0v O O S Spd 1450r min Oxs Oxr Db Oxr Qs rst 0000H S Spd 1450r min Encoder pulse rate for Z phase Pulse s S Spd 1450r nin e PRG gt 3 gt 2 3 6 e Do Lv 3ea8c Dv2 L v3A L v4A L vsA PRG gt 3 gt 2 6 6
130. ally enters Alarm mode In A this mode you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related o information on the LCD monitor Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition Z Qo Figure 3 3 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes If the y inverter is turned ON it automatically enters Running mode making it possible to start or stop the gt motor N Power ON Programming mode Run Stop motor Setting function codes Monitoring running status Monitoring various statuses PRG S 0 Quick Setup l Start up 2 Function Code 3 INV Info 4 Alarm Info 5 User Confi GITEN MI G 9 34d Set Speed 1450 STOP Iout 0 00A PWR 0 03k4 Gi9 ProgramMenufd SON Release of x ss an alarm ES EN Alarm mode Display alarm status Occurrence of A an alarm Latest Alarm v This transition by key is OC 1 ignored during occurring an alarm Over Current During ACC GO ProgramMenufa Figure 3 3 Screens Transition between each operation Modes 3 3 Running Mode When the inverter is turned on it automatically enters Running mode in which you can 1 Monitor the running status e g reference speed and output current 2 Switch between remote and local modes 3 Configure the reference speed pre ramp and 4 Run stop the motor 3 3 4 Monitoring the running status In Running mode the nine items listed below can be monitored Imm
131. and braking resistor models Default setting of these parameters might not be suitable for your braking resistor therefore before using this function ask for the correct data to your braking resistors supplier Note Depending on the thermal characteristics of the braking resistor the electronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the overheat protection alarm dbH even if the actual temperature rise is not large enough If this happens review the relationship between the performance index of the braking resistor and settings of related function codes Calculating the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor and configuring the function code data Ask to the resistor manufacturer about the resistor rating and then configure the related function codes In lift applications the braking load is constant vertical load Use Expressions 1 and 2 given below Braking load KW Braking load kW h l time m time lt Applying braking load during deceleration gt lt Applying braking load during running at a constant speed B Discharging capability F50 The discharging capability refers to kWs allowance for a single braking cycle It can be calculated from breaking F50 ata 1 to 9000 1 to 9000 kWs OFF Disable the electronic thermal overload protection Braking time s x Motor rated capacity k Discharging capability KWs Fano fre o Moor rated
132. and switch to jogging operation A run command e g FWD and JOG command should be entered within 100 ms Note that if the input of a run command precedes that of the JOG command the inverter runs in ordinary operation until the input of the JOG command 2 77 z deyo SHd09 NOILONNA C21 Speed Command Unit C21 specifies units for setting the speed Data for C21 and the specified units are as follows Data for C21 Speed command unit r min m min Hz mm s Changing C21 data converts previously specified function code data into a newly specified unit for display It also modifies the setting range automatically Note Changing the C21 data requires modifying the data of some function codes For details refer to section 2 2 Relational equations between Hz and other units 1 r min and Hz r min pos A Pe 2 m min and Hz V max 20x Hz 60 m min z xl N max Pe 1000 3 mm s and Hz nmm s ES Ree x120x E N max Pe Where Pe Motor No of poles P01 poles Nmax Rated speed F03 r min Vmax Elevator speed L31 mm s Note As shown in the above equations changing the data of any of function codes P01 F03 and L31 automatically modifies the inverter s speed settings specified in r min or m min Analog Input Type C22 selects the analog input type of analog multistep speed command C22 is valid when you set 3 to F01 For details refer to functio
133. anguage to be displayed on LCD monitor 2 Select application PRG gt 1 gt 2 E A A of function codes that 3 Display settings PRG gt 1 gt 3 Selects content to be displayed on LCD screen 2 Function Code Setting screens related to function codes such as setting copying function code data Setdata PRG gt 2 gt 1 Allows function code data to be displayed changed 2 Confirm data PRG gt 2 gt 2 Allows confirmation of function code settings 3 Confirm revised data PRG gt 2 gt 3 Allows confirmation of function code changes from factory default settings Reads writes and verifies function code data between a COPY data Hp the inverter and the keypad 5 initialize data PRG gt 2 gt 5 Restores function code data values to factory default settings 3 INV Informati on Allows monitoring of inverter operational status 1 Operation monitor PRG gt 3 gt 1 Displays operational information 2 TO checking PRG gt 3 gt 2 Displays external interface information Displ lati ti ther inf ti 3 Maintenance information PRG gt 3 gt 3 isplays cumulative run time and other information used during maintenance a i i ial 4 Onrintormiati n PRG gt 3 gt 4 Allows confirmation of inverter type serial number and ROM version Allows confirmation and setting of travel direction 5 Travel direction counter PRG gt 3 gt 5 counter This function provides the information for replacing wire rope 4 Alarm Informati
134. arm automatically Pre Alarm Inverter is detecting pre alarm by overheat Standby Inverter is in standby mode by means of STBY command Unlocking SG Inverter is trying to unlock safety gear by means of ULSG command Rescue by BRKS Inverter is releasing brakes for emergency rescue operation by means of RBRK command Battery Op Inverter is operating as battery mode by means of BATRY command DC Cap Measure Inverter is measuring its main capacitor lifetime before turning power OFF L Factor Measure Inverter is measuring load factor of the applying system Note LCD has temperature characteristics The low temperature slows down the LCD response the high temperature makes the screen contrast high so that contrast adjustment may be needed 3 4 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes The keypad has the following three operation modes B Running mode After powered ON the inverter automatically enters this mode This mode allows you to specify the reference speed and run stop the motor with the amp amp amp 6 93 keys during local mode It is also possible to monitor the running status in real time deu E Programming mode This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of Oo information relating to the inverter status and maintenance a B Alarm mode Ifan alarm condition arises the inverter automatic
135. ation time 10 L09 Filter Time Constant for Reference Speed Final L10 Filter Time Constant for Detected Speed L36 ASR P constant at high speed L37 ASR I time constant at high speed L38 ASR P constant at low speed L39 ASR I time constant at low speed L42 ASR Feed forward gain L55 Torque Bias Startup timer L56 Torque Bias Reference torque end time L57 Torque Bias Limiter L58 Torque Bias P constant L59 Torque Bias Integral time L60 Torque Bias Driving side gain L61 Torque Bias Braking side gain L62 Torque Bias Digital 1 L63 Torque Bias Digital 2 L64 Torque Bias Digital 3 L68 Unbalanced Load Compensation ASR P constant L69 Unbalanced Load Compensation ASR I constant L73 Unbalanced Load Compensation APR P constant L74 Unbalanced Load Compensation APR D gain L75 Unbalanced Load Compensation Filter Time Constant for Detected speed L93 Overheat and Overload Early Warning Level 2 125 B Function codes for the customizable logic Function code number Name Range Minimum unit Remarks U121 to U140 User parameter 1 to 20 9990 00 to 9990 00 Effective number are 3 digits 0 01 to 10 U171 to U175 Storage area 1 to 5 9990 00 to 9990 00 Effective number are 3 digits 0 01 to 10 Memorize the data when powered off B Configuration of function codes Set
136. avel Direction Changes lifetime early warning TDCL Function code data 121 This output function will go from OFF to ON when L112 level is reached Function L112 is a percentage of L111 limit level This level is reached when L113 reaches the percentage of L111 set in L112 When output function is in ON condition and L113 becomes different than L111 percentage of L112 output will go to OFF condition Liftime early warning function is linked to a light alarm called tC W L112 set to 0 is understood as disabled So in this case inverter will not show any warning and output will not go from OFF to ON even 120 or 1120 is set For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L109 to L115 TDC and L197 For additional information refer to related Application Note AN Lift2 0004v100EN Bi Travel Direction Changes pulse TDCP Function code data 122 This ouput function generates a pulse each time that L113 counter is increased In other words digital output generates a pulse each time that RUN command changes from FWD ro REV or from REV to FWD When EN terminal signals are not ON pulse is not counted as no real lift travel can be performed This pulse has a duration of 0 5 s For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L109 to L115 TDC For additional information refer to related Application Note AN Lift2 0004v100EN E Short circuit control SCC Function code data 123 SCC output functi
137. bove graph during the detection time L92 The speed 1s within domains D or Q in the below graph during the detection time H77 The speed 1s within domains D through Q in the below graph during the detection time L92 L93 Overheat Early Warning Level When the temperature reaches the overheat early warning level that is n C below the trip level the inverter issues an overheat early warning signal L93 specifies the n C The early warning signal OH is assigned to a general purpose programmable output terminal by setting 28 with E20 to E24 and E27 Data setting range 1 to 20 deg Current status ON conditions OFF conditions 3 retained When any of the following conditions is When all of the following conditions Except the met the OH signal is turned ON are met the OH signal is turned OFF conditions listed at The heat sink temperature is higher The heat sink temperature is lower left than Heat sink overheat trip than Heat sink overheat trip temperature L93 setting temperature L93 setting 3 C The inverter inside temperature 1s The inverter inside temperature 1s higher than Internal overheat trip lower than Internal overheat trip temperature L93 setting temperature L93 setting 3 C The IGBT junction temperature is The IGBT junction temperature is higher than Inverter overload trip lower than Inverter overload trip temperature L93 s
138. by the corresponding function code In battery operation the acceleration deceleration time specified by E17 is selected The S curve is disabled in acceleration or deceleration When the inverter runs by analog speed command in battery operation the acceleration time for E10 and deceleration time for E11 are selected Decide the battery operation speed by calculating with the following formula based on the battery voltage The battery voltage should be above 48 VDC in case of 400 V inverter 2 74 2 3 Overview of Function Code Reference speed pre ramp during battery operation lt Batter voltage 5 V Rated speed x k 2 x Rated voltage Reference speed pre ramp during battery operation Setting of C03 in the multistep speed operation when the manual speed middle is selected Base speed F04 Rated voltage F05 motor rated voltage V k Safety coefficient less than 1 and may be about 0 8 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 E Block diagram in case of batteries and FRN0032LM2A 4 or below 73X Power supply MC2 222 Inverter Battery f e i UPS ROO Control circuit etc i E Block diagram in case of UPS Inverter Control circuit IL LII ID ae eS ee ee 2 75 E Operation Scheme Main power MC1 Battery power supply BATRY MC2 SS E m 73X jp T4 T2 Battery operation DC link bus voltage Edc 0 15 allowable zone Undervo
139. cause larger current do not modify the default setting unless it is necessary Data setting range 0 0 to 5 0 It is a special code of the torque vector control Refer to page 2 2 for the control mode of the inverter Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor Select motor characteristics Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor Overload detection level Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor Thermal time constant F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor inside the inverter E Select motor characteristics F10 F10 specifies the cooling mechanism of the motor built in cooling fan or externally powered forced ventilation fan Data for F10 Function For general purpose motors with built in self cooling fan l The cooling effect will decrease in low speed operation For inverter driven motors or high speed motors with forced ventilation fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output speed About F10 1 The figure below shows operation characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection Actual output current Continuous Overload detection level F11 fb Rated frequency i i Primary frequency fo f3 fo fo Hz 0 Cooling Characteristics of Motor Equipped with a Self cooling Fan Switching
140. ce the magnetic pole position is not suitable immediately after turning on of the power supply when a synchronous motor is driven by using the encoder of the ABZ method L01 1 Therefore after the magnetic pole position tuning is automatically done before it begins to drive it begins to drive In second operation or later because the magnetic pole position has been correct the magnetic pole position tuning is not done Data for L07 Function 0 The automatic magnetic pole position tuning doesn t operate The tuning with terminal X operates in the mode of L03 4 and operation changes because of the setting of L99 bit1 The automatic magnetic pole position tuning operates The tuning with terminal X operates in the mode of L07 L99 bitl doesn t influence LL Refer to the explanation of PPT for details Note When the function of the automatic magnetic pole position tuning is set to be effective L04 is not used as a magnetic pole position offset Tip When the function of the automatic magnetic pole position tuning is set to be effective the used magnetic pole position offset in this mode is confirmed by function code M58 2 138 2 3 Overview of Function Code If L07 is not 0 and the following conditions are satisfied the magnetic pole position tuning is automatically executed in operation command turning ON PTD is OFF The magnetic pole position tuning has not done EN terminal is ON The PG vector control f
141. ce Speed Gina holding time torque end time H67 L56 Stop speed Run command Inverter main circuit ugg sm S output gate ON In case of Torque Vector control Reference speed final Stop speed holding time H67 Stop speed Run command Inverter main circuit output gate 2 44 2 3 Overview of Function Code Motor Sound Carrier frequency H98 Protection Maintenance Function L198 Operation setting switch 1 F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or inverter itself and to decrease a leakage current from the main output secondary wirings z deyo Carrier frequency Motor sound noise emission Motor temperature due to harmonics components Ripples in output current waveform Leakage current 3002 NOILONNA Electromagnetic noise emission titt jst itis Inverter loss B Operation setting switch 1 Fixation of the carrier frequency L198 bit0 If F26 is set to 16 and L198 bitO is set to 1 the inverter will be running with 16 kHz of carrier frequency independently of the output frequency Note Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to have a large amount of ripples many harmonics components As a result the motor loss increases causing the motor temperature to rise Furthermore the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm When a high carrier fre
142. celeration Time 3 to 10 F07 and F08 specify the acceleration or deceleration time in linear acceleration deceleration zones excluding S curve zones The acceleration deceleration time is the length of time required for the speed to linearly increase from 0 00 r min to the rated speed F03 or decrease from the maximum speed to 0 00 r min respectively Data setting range 0 00 to 99 9 s Speed Acceleration Deceleration time F07 time F08 x mn gt lt mm gt Rated speed F03 PPP DU EEEETETTI n an seine San sine 7 Time 5 Actual length of time Actual length of time required for reaching required for reaching the maximum speed 0 00 r min Tip When the inverter runs by an analog speed command the acceleration and deceleration times specified by F07 and F08 are aplied When speed profile is generated on the controller with analog signal please set F07 and F08 to 0 00 s On the other hand a small value on F07 and F08 0 01 s or similar may help if speed generated by the controller is not good enough smother operation Also in local mode the acceleration and deceleration times specified by F07 and F08 apply 2 35 Torque boost Determines the torque boost for torque vector control Basically there is no need to modify the default setting If you need more torque please change the value However as too much setting of F09 may
143. ched to the ones for high speed when the switching speed specified by L40 lowers than the reference speed final Data setting range 0 00 to 6000 r min 3002 NOILONNA ASR ASR P constant and constant constants L37 P constant and constant L39 are calculated by 1 1 formula L38 P constant L39 constant at low speed L36 P constant L37 constant at high speed L36 P constant L37 constant at high speed Reference speed final L40 L41 L41 L40 Switching Switching Switching Switching speed 1 speed 2 speed 2 speed 1 Reference speed final L42 ASR Feed forward gain The FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters supports the feed forward control that directly adds a torque value determined by deviation in a reference speed final to the reference torque Data setting range 0 000 to 10 000 s The PI control of the ASR is a feedback control It monitors the result detected speed of the target operation and deals with any deviation from the desired operation reference speed pre ramp for correction for following the reference speed pre ramp The merit of this control is that it can make corrections even for directly unmeasurable factors such as unmeasurable disturbance and uncertainty of the control target The demerit is that the control makes follow up corrections after detecting any deviation reference speed final detected speed even for foreknown changes Since t
144. code data 75 This output signal comes ON when the main circuit output gate of the inverter is ON and the detected speed is lower than the stop speed specified by function code F25 E PG abnormal PG ABN Function code data 76 This output signal comes ON when any PG error is detected For details refer to the description of function codes L90 to L92 PG Error Detection E Door control DOPEN Function code data 78 This output signal controls the elevator door For details refer to the description of function codes L87 to L89 Door Control and L99 bit E Alarm output for any alarm ALM Function code data 99 E EN detection circuit fault DECF Function code data 101 This output signal comes ON when the EN1 EN2 status detection circuit is defective It can be outputted separately from the relay alarm output E EN terminal off ENOFF Function code data 102 2 62 2 3 Overview of Function Code This is a status output signal that comes ON when the EN1 EN2 terminal is not available It goes OFF when the output signal DECF is ON Bl Low voltage detected LVD Function code data 104 This output signal comes ON when a low voltage is detected E Electric angle cycle EAC Function code data 105 When Magnetic pole position offset value of a synchronous motor is set by manual tuning ower EAC is used If 90 lt electric angle 270 EAC is ON E Magnetic pole posi
145. control for asynchronous motor These control modes can be switched by the combination of function codes F42 Control Mode and terminal command PG H7 as listed below F42 Control PG Hz Control Mode Selected Mode ON Vector control with PG for asynchronous motor 2 OFF Torque Vector control without PG for asynchronous motor ON Vector control with PG for synchronous motor 2 OFF V f control for asynchronous motor ON OFF Torque Vector control without PG for asynchronous motor 1 The ON OFF states in this table are expressed in the normal logic No assignment of PG Hz to any terminal is treated as ON 2 An option card is needed For details refer to the instruction manual of the option card ANCAUTION V f control should apply to a test run only Applying V f control to elevator operation is dangerous With this setting the inverter may not run in sufficient performance Torque Vector control is a control mode that doesn t use the encoder The accuracy of the speed control is inferior to that of the vector control with PG Use it after doing the initial evaluation An accident or physical injury may result In the torque vector control some function codes are invalid Whether a function code is valid or invalid is indicated with the following notations in the Torque vector control column of the function code tables given below Y Valid The function code data affe
146. cts the inverter operations N Invalid The function code data does not affect the inverter operations 2 2 2 4 Function Code Tables B Corresponding software version Function code list also shows software version which the function was added The blank of software version column shows the functions are available since the first version The software version can be checked by the followings Maintenance screen PRG gt 3 gt 3 gt 8 9 or Unit information screen PRG gt 3 gt 4 on the multi functional keypad TP A1 LM2 option Confirming M25 of function code for communication 2 3 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters Default setting EM OFF B F codes Fundamental Functions Change Code Data setting range Men bed running FOO Data Protection 0 Disable data protection Function code data can be edited 1 Enable data protection Note This setting is effective if H99 00004 Password entry 00014 to FFFFH Note This setting is effective if H99 other than 00004 Data of H99 is your password F01 Speed Command 0 Multistep speed command SS 7 S82 84 SS8 1 Analog speed command Not reversible 2 Analog speed command Reversible 3 Analog multistep speed command F05 Rated Voltage 80 to 240 200V series Y2 F07 Acceleration Deceleration 0 00 to 99 9 Variable F08 Acceleration Decele
147. d If voltage on DC link is below or equal to L125 level rescue operation cannot be performed inverter will trip LV as soon as RUN command FWD or REV is given even BATRY function is activated in any input In figure 1 a rescue operation sequence when DC link voltage is over L125 level is shown Main power BEI MC1 Sei BATRY i MC2 73X MSN es NECEM UEM UPS batteries power supply bd f i T1 irj UPS batteries operation allowable zone DC link bus voltage Edc Undervoltage level L125 UPS batteries minimum operation level Output Frequency C03 Battery UPS operation speed A cue T 0 WA i gt lt gt gt E17 E17 FWD ON Figure 1 Rescue operation sequence when DC link gt L125 2 187 As it can be observed Main supply is gone for any reason At this point power supply is changed from mains to batteries or UPS by means of MCI and MC2 MCI links mains supply to the inverter MC2 links batteries or UPS supply to the inverter When MC2 is closed voltage increases on DC Link This voltage reaches L125 level When inverter and controller are ready to perform rescue operation it starts because DC link voltage level is over L125 In figure 2 a rescue operation sequence when DC link voltage is below L125 level is shown Main power LON MC1 NENESENEN BATRY__ 2 U 73X ENS j ON UPS batteries power Supply WNNENEEENEENEEEEEEEEN
148. d being ON a Period specified by E19 Run command Run command OFF Confirmation for multistep speed command Less than the period specified by E19 Run command ON j Period specified by E19 MON Nd SS2 SS4 Low speed 2 55 High speed c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 E20 E21 Signal Assignment to Y1 to Y2 Transistor signal E22 to E27 Signal Assignment to Y3A C to Y5A C and 30A B C Relay contact signal E20 to E24 and E27 assign output signals listed on the next page to general purpose programmable output terminals Y1 Y2 Y3A C to Y5A C and 30A B C These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as active The factory default settings are Active ON Terminals Y1 and Y2 are transistor outputs and terminals Y3A C to YSA C and 30A B C are relay contact outputs In normal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be energized so that 30A and 30C will be closed and 30B and 30C opened In negative logic the relay will be deenergized so that 30A and 30C will be opened and 30B and 30C closed This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems Note When a negative logic is employed all output signals are active e g an alarm would be recognized w
149. d to access to the same function code in the customizable logic If the access to the target function code from different steps at a time is executed the alarm is displayed 2 120 Function 1 U04 etc 0 to 255 Function 2 U05 etc 71 to 75 2 3 Overview of Function Code Block Function Function 1 Function 2 selection Description U01 etc block U04 etc U05 etc Temporary This function reflects the value of the specified 0 to 255 change of function code on the volatile memory RAM function when the input 2 becomes 0 False On the code other hand when the input 2 does not become 0 False this function reflects the value of input 1 in the place of the function code z deyo The value on the volatile memory RAM is cleared when the inverter is powered off And the value is read from the non volatile memory and restored when the inverter is powered on S302 NOILONNA Set the function code group function type code to thelst function code U04 etc Set the lower 2 digits of the function code No to the 2nd function U05 etc If the specified function code U04 UOS etc is not applicable one this function outputs zero value Because the access arbitration from some steps at a time 1s not possible only one step is allowed with to access to the same function code in the customizable logic When the function code is temporarily changed using 6003 during the cus
150. dition inverter will be stopped by Er6 However during the time lag set by L84 after changing the status of SW52 2 or CS MC Er6 is not generated Set L84 in consideration of time from the change of SW52 2 to the change of CS MC When SW52 3 is set instead of SW 52 2 it operates in the state of SW52 3 and CS MC When both SW52 2 and SW 52 3 are set it operates in the state of SW52 2 and CS MC 2 164 2 3 Overview of Function Code Run Command MENHNHEUNEEEEE 8 88 EN ERHZ X OO Sw522 ME SW52 3 M 8 CS MC MENEENEEEENS NENNEN Dy Timer is reset Er6 trip L84 timer SW52 2 Timing Scheme Run Command ON 5 5 S523 M O SW52 3 M CS MS ON Timer is reset Er6 trip L84 timer SW52 3 Timing Scheme Function code of confirmation time for this function and brake check time L84 are common 2 165 c es Z O a O z Q Og m 02 L87 Door Control Door open starting speed L88 Door Control Door open delay time L89 Door Control Door open period L87 to L89 specify the door open parameters relating to the door control signal DOPEN that is assigned to a general purpose programmable output terminal by setting 78 with E20 to E24 and E27 E Door open starting speed L87 L87 specifies the reference speed final at which the door control signal DOPEN is turned ON The DOPEN is turned ON actually after the door open delay time
151. during the check up or adjustment of the machinery Data is then brought back to a normal state without an alarm Deleting the alarm information requires simultaneous keying of ror A keys Data for H97 0 Disable Function Clear all This data clears all alarm data stored and returns H97 to 0 Protection Maintenance Function F26 Motor Sound Carrier frequency H98 specifies whether to enable or disable automatic lowering of the carrier frequency protection against input phase loss judgment on the DC link bus capacitor life and the change of judgment criteria on the DC link bus capacitor life and the selection of short circuit detection in a style of combination To set data of the function code H98 assign functions to each bit total 8 bits The table below lists functions assigned to each bit Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit 0 Select life judgment Lower the Detect carrier Cancel Judge the Detect Function detecting of thermistor cut line braking transistor breakdown life of DC link bus capacitor criteria of DC link bus capacitor Output phase loss Detect input phase loss frequency automati cally Disable Disable Disable Factory default setting Disable Disable Disable Data 1 User s setting Default Set the unassigned data to 0 2 100 0 2 3 Overview of Function Code Lower the ca
152. e So ure op dede ad e E ee T e apne ao 3 30 3 5 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode sss 3 30 3 52 Displaying the alarm histoty eed estet ie ee ete ett iHe eR e ded 3 30 3 5 3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm sse 3 30 o U m S d o z c ui E E x r z N 3 1 LCD monitor keys and LED indicators on the keypad 3 1 LCD monitor keys and LED indicators on the keypad The keypad TP A1 LM2 allows you to run and stop the motor monitor the running status specify the function code data and monitor I O signal states maintenance information and alarm information LED indicators STATUS LCD monitor En Speed 1450 rin RUN t 18 668 MV 7 2 3k Gi Program Mei Program key ae 3 eil ool RESETkey Wl P je s n nie uM HELP key Programming keys Run key forward Run key reverse UP DOWN LEFT RIGH ET key arrow key Figure 3 1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components LED indicators These indicators show the current running status of the inverter Refer to Table 3 1 LCD monitor This monitor shows the following various information about the inverter according to the operation modes Refer to Figure 3 2 and Table 3 3 and Table 3 4 These keys are used to perform various inverter operations Refer to Table 3 2 Table 3 1
153. e battery capacity In the case of normal operation turn off BATRY If the main power supply is turned ON with BATRY being ON it could damage the inverter rectifier diode due to the inrush current by 73X ON state 2 76 2 3 Overview of Function Code C04 to C19 Multistep Speed F01 Speed Command C04 through C19 specify zero speed to high speed for multistep speed change Turning SS7 SS2 SS4 and SS8 assigned to digital input terminals ON and OFF changes the speed Data setting range 0 00 to 6000 r min LL Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 For details refer to function code F01 xc 3 D NE D Operation Speed H54 Acceleration time Jogging H55 xc 3 D NE D time Jogging C20 BER the Jogging operation speed Data setting range 0 00 to 6000 r min LO Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 B Jogging operation The terminal command JOG can be assigned to a programmable input terminal by setting 10 With the JOG being ON turning FWD or REV ON starts the jogging operation regardless of the F01 setting In jogging operation the acceleration and deceleration times specified by H54 and H55 apply respectively Note Turning the JOG ON when the inverter is running in ordinary operation cannot switch the inverter to jogging operation Stop the inverter once
154. e constant 0 000 to 5 000 0 001 Setpoint factor via communication Numerator 32768 to 32767 Denominator 32768 to 32767 1 The data setting range is variable Referto Section 2 2 3 The unit changes depending on the setting of C21 2 8 Software version which can be used 2 4 Function Code Tables E P codes Motor Parameters i Change Data Default Torque Softwam Code Data setting range Increment Unit when s vector version which z copying setting running control can be used Mi P01 z deyo No of poles 2 to 100 P02 Rated capacity 0 01 to 55 00 N Yd YZ Refer to default table P03 Rated current Variable N Y1Y2 Refer to default table P04 Auto tuning Disable T 1 Enable Tune R1 and X while the motor is stopped Enable Tune R1 X no load current and rated slip while the motor is stopped Enable Tune R1 X and rated slip while the motor is stopped no load current is calculated by the motor constant 4 Enable Auto tuning current loop ACR proportional gain SHd09 NOILONNA PO6 No oad current 0 00 to 500 0 Variable Y Y2 Refer to default table P07 0 00 to 50 00 Y1Y2 Refer to default table Refer to default P08 0 00 to 50 00 a 9 per 9 001 P09 Slip comp driving gain 0 0 to 200 0 P10 Slip comp braking gain 0 0 to 200 0 P11 Slip comp response time 0 05 to 1 00 P12 Rated slip 0 00 Rated slip of Fuji standard
155. e so that the landing position comes to be level L36 ASR P constant at high speed L37 ASR I constant at high speed L38 ASR P constant at low speed L39 ASR I constant at low speed L40 ASR Switching speed 1 L41 ASR Switching speed 2 L36 through L39 specify the P and I constants each at high and low speed for the auto speed regulator ASR High and low speeds can be switched according to the ASR switching speeds 1 and 2 L40 and L41 LL For details about the ASR switching speed refer to the descriptions of L40 and L41 E ASR P constant L36 and L38 The P constant should be specified in proportional to the inertia and machine constant of the load connected to the motor shaft If P constant 1 00 it means that the reference torque comes to be 100 of the rated torque output of each inverter capacity when the speed difference Reference speed final Detected speed is 100 equivalent to the maximum speed setting Data setting range 0 01 to 200 00 Increasing the P constant relative to the inertia makes response from machinery or equipment fast but may cause overshooting or hunting in motor Further due to resonance of machinery or overamplified noise machinery or motor may produce vibration noise On the contrary decreasing the P constant excessively delays response and may cause speed fluctuation in a long cycle taking time to stabilize the speed B Note E ASR I constant L37 and L39 The int
156. e speed pre ramp are as described below When the reference speed pre ramp change yields deceleration during acceleration Reference speed final at the time of change gt Reference speed pre ramp the inverter performs a short floor operation LL Refer to the description of function code L29 for a short floor operation On the contrary when the speed changes to acceleration during deceleration the inverter immediately starts S curve acceleration which may make an impact on the load Acceleration deceleration times in S curve operation In an S curve operation the acceleration deceleration time t can be calculated by the following formulae If the speed deviation exceeds the S curve zone N2 NI N max x Sida E N2 NI 51482 xT N max 100 S14 82 If the speed deviation is within the S curve zone N7 N2 N max x pma Pals 100 S85 Nmax Sl S2 100 Where Nmax Maximum speed r min NI Speed before the start of acceleration deceleration r min N2 Speed after the end of acceleration deceleration r min Sl S curve zone of the maximum speed at the start of acceleration at the end of deceleration S2 S curve zone of the maximum speed at the end of acceleration at the start of deceleration T Acceleration period s required from 0 00 r min to the rated speed F03 Or Deceleration period s required from the rated speed F03 to 0 00 r min t Acceleration decelerat
157. e vector open loop control for IM Running status PG Hz B Enable vector control TrqLimit B During torque limitation Low Volt m During low supply voltage Operational status FAR B Frequency attained FDT B Frequency detection RDY m Ready to run FAN Bi Cooling fan operating 4 TRY B Trying automatic resetting alarm OH B Overheat early warning LIFE n Lifetime warning ID m Current detection ID2 m Current detection 2 Reference torque TRQC Value based on the motor rated torque being at 100 Reference torque current TRQI Value based on the motor rated current being at 100 Reference torque bias TRQB Value based on the motor rated torque being at 100 Electronic thermal for motor OLM Value based on the electronic thermal overload protection being at 100 Detected motor temperature NTC Detected motor temperature C CAN Sta Operational status CAN status CAN Bus Error status CAN STM State machine status Splnit Initial speed before acceleration deceleration mm s i ti m Acceleration Decelerati n SpTrgt Target speed after acceleration deceleration mm s distance calculation Dist Calculated distance which takes during acc dec mm Page 7 Acceleration distance Acc Maximum acceleration rate mm s Page 8 Deceleration distance Jerk1 1 jerk mm s Jerk2 2 jerk mm s In vector control with PG this item shows the refe
158. e whether handle it with alarm or driving continuous H98 bit7 0 Alarm treatment stop inverter by OHI alarm H98 bit7 1 Driving continuous keeping driving inverter without alarm ANCAUTION If you select driving continuous H98 bit5 1 or bit7 1 the inverter can be driven as emergency measure However it drives without the temperature protection function When the inverter keeps driving under such a condition there 1s a possibility of finally causing the damage of the inverter Please contact our company promptly and remove the fault disconnection of the harness Doing so could cause fire an accident or injuries Password Protection F00 Data Protection H99 specifies a password Data setting range 0000y Disable password protection 00014 to FFFFy Enable password protection For details refer to function code F00 2 103 2 3 6 U codes Customizable logic operation The customizable logic function allows the user to form a logic or operation circuit for digital analog input output signals customize those signals arbitrarily and configure a simple relay sequence inside the inverter In the customizable logic one step component depending on the type is composed of 1 Digital 2 inputs digital 1 output logical operation including timer 2 Analog 2 inputs analog 1 output digital 1 output numerical operation 3 Analog 1 input digital 1 input analog 1 output numerical op
159. ed pre ramp in displayed units with N Q keys on the keypad 1 Switch the keypad to Running mode This is because in Programming or Alarm mode the J keys are disabled to set the reference speed pre ramp 2 Press the 3 Q key to display the current reference speed pre ramp The lowest digit will blink 3 To change the reference speed pre ramp press the 3 Q key again The new setting can be saved into the inverter s internal memory In local mode In remote mode Set Speed Set Speed 1450 Dig Speed Ref 0 00 1450 00 Ref HAND Ref Multistep EPG cI DDD Close _ Setting range Speed command source See the table3 5 Figure 3 5 Setting up reference speed display sample Cr The reference frequency will be saved either automatically by turning the main power OFF When you start specifying the reference speed pre ramp or any other parameter with the W O key the least significant digit on the display blinks that is the cursor lies in the least significant digit Holding down the O Q key changes data in the least significant digit and generates a carry while the cursor remains in the least significant digit Using the C key moves the cursor blinking between digits making change to the large value easily 3 7 Table 3 6 Available Speed command sources Command source Symbol Command source HAND Keypad Multistep Multistep speed command Analog
160. ediately after the inverter is turned on the monitor item specified by function code K 10 is displayed Press the 3 key to switch between monitor items Table 3 5 Monitoring Items Selectable anytime Monitor Sub Function pou Monitor Items bes Meaning of displayed value code data monitor for E43 0 Speed monitor Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the main monitor 0 Reference speed Reference speed final command to the e final Spd i Automatic speed regulator ASR EAS 0 Reference speed precum S Spd 1 Reference speed being set E48 2 Motor speed Sync r min Motor rotation speed E48 3 Elevator speed Lift m min Elevator speed in m min E48 5 Elevator speed 2 Lift mm s Elevator speed in mm s E48 8 Output current Current output from the inverter in RMS Output voltage Voltage output from the inverter in RMS Calculated torque Calculated motor output torque in 2 Input power Input power to the inverter Reference torque Motor output torque in 96 Torque bias balance adjustment value Used to adjust the analog torque bias balance Torque bias gain adjustment value Used to adjust the analog torque bias gain Function code C21 provides a choice of speed units Hz r min m min and mm s 2 n vector control with PG this item shows the reference torque Speed Main Monitor 30 T Bias Gain 13 Output Current GPG Ca
161. eds uoyesedo NYO 10 G8 SY el BuibBo 9 qeu3 yul suoneoiunuuuoo 9iqeu3 pueuiuoo peeds puewwoo peeds dejsniniN OLN uoroejep eunjeJeduie JOJO amp O O T 92H l i991 l JOISIUUSY 1d r 1 WHL leuis jndjno 70 Jojejed 12H e W09 i THO Uue v PE RU d lt O O i OLN OLd E L 92H epo apon Jojsiuueuy Josue 91d 91N 21d EAS MM S ueg SHO c2 Qro 00LF A 0LF Se ea A Je he 5 Q T evo cA MS juejsuoo Sw 19yI3 ueg Jesyo l Geo ged l Y P z 9600 9 0 yw oc 9 v Aj x 5 D IZA CD io enel juejsuoo RT eun JOYS Vois PRI ejewpJeH FO ule SHO 420 Oo E 9600L AOLF x lei O juejsuoo Su 19yI3 ixl 619 6 peeds u amp in O4 G19 z peeds y6IH O7 110 Peeds uBIH Gr O 19 Peeds eippi O G00 p ds moq UD O7 809 wol peeds jenueyy Gr O1 202 peeds deag Gu O1 03 p ds soueuajuleyy O G00 eippiu peeds jenue D O4 03 peeds osez QD 63 Gs 8ss bss Jeu juswaelbe uonemosse _ mE peeds SER puewwog dazsnny puewwoo p ds uny daysnin Figure 1 1 Block Diagram of Reference Speed pre ramp Command Generator 1 2 1 3 Reference Torque Command Generator Chap 1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC puewwo seiq enbJo 0 se owes 4 p NVO 7UD Sgr Su c LUD Sez Su vs yreuiuue p L03 0 es a jO o
162. eed 0 00 to 200 0 F20 DCB Starting Speed 0 00 to 5 00 C04 Zero Speed to C19 High 0 00 to 200 0 Speed 9 F23 Starting Speed 0 00 to 5 00 C20 Jogging Operation Speed 0 00 to 200 0 F25 Stop Speed 0 00 to 5 00 H74 Speed Agreement 0 00 to 200 0 Hysteresis L30 Short Floor Operation E30 Speed Arrival Hysteresis 0 00 to 200 0 Allowable speed 0 00 to 200 0 A ad Detection Detection 0 00 to 200 0 L40 ASR Switching speed 1 0 00 to 200 0 E32 Speed Detection Hysteresis 0 00 to 30 00 L41 ASR Switching speed 2 0 00 to 200 0 E36 Speed Detection 2 Detection 0 00 to 200 0 L87 Door Control Door open 0 00 to 200 0 level starting speed Hz Relational expression of r min and Hz r min 120 x PE e i Vmax Hz Relational expression of mm s and Hz mm s x120x Hz Nmax Pe i max Hz 60 Relational expression of m min and Hz m min x 120 x x pnm Nmax Pe 1000 Definition of sign Pe POl Motor No of poles pole Nmax F03 Rated Speed r min Vmax L31 Elevator Speed mm s 2 22 2 3 Overview of Function Code 2 3 Overview of Function Codes This section provides a detailed description of the function codes available for the FRENIC Lift LM2 series of inverters In each code group its function codes are arranged in an ascending order of the identifying numbers for ease of access Note that function codes closely related each other for the implementation of an inverter s o
163. egative logic Data Selectable Signals 0000 1000 General purpose output signals Same as the ones specified by E20 e g RUN Inverter running FAR Fre quency speed arrival signal FDT Frequency to speed dee LU Un drola detected Inverter stopped Note 27 Universal DO is not available 0129 1129 Note amid logic output signals from 141 1141 to 150 1150 cannot be selected 2001 3001 Output of step 1 S0001 to to 2200 3200 Output of step 200 SO200 4001 5001 Terminal X1 input signal X1 4002 5002 Terminal X2 input signal X2 4003 5003 Terminal X3 input signal X3 4004 5004 Terminal X4 input signal X4 4005 5005 Terminal X5 input signal X5 4006 5006 Terminal X6 input signal X6 4007 5007 Terminal X7 input signal X7 4008 5008 Terminal X8 input signal X8 4010 5010 Terminal FWD input signal FWD 4011 5011 Terminal REV input signal REV 6000 7000 Final RUN command FL_ RUN ON when a run command is given 6001 7001 Final i run command FL FWD ON when a run forward command is given 6002 7002 Final REV run command FL REV ON when a run reverse command is given 6007 7007 Alarm factor presence ALM ACT ON when there is no alarm factor 2 112 2 3 Overview of Function Code B Function 1 U04 etc Digital
164. egral constant for the ASR should be specified to the I constant Since the integration refers to integrating of deviation at the interval of time specified by I constant setting a small constant shortens the integration interval making a faster response On the contrary setting a large constant lengthens it having a less effect on the ASR To allow overshooting and reach the target speed quickly specify a small constant Data setting range 0 001 to 1 000 s 2 148 2 3 Overview of Function Code Note An integral action refers to a delay component The integral constant is the gain of the delay component Making the integral action highly responsive increases the delay component unstabilizing the control system including the motor and machinery It takes the form of overshooting or vibration z deyo One solution for the resonance of machinery generating abnormal mechanical noise from the motor or gears is to increase the integral constant If there is any request not to delay response from machinery or equipment examine the machinery causing the resonance and take any necessary measures at the machinery side BASR switching speeds L40 and L41 L40 and L41 specify the speed at which the P and I constants to be applied are switched between the ones for high speed L36 and L37 and the ones for low speed L38 and L39 The switching pattern samples are shown below Note that if L41 lt L40 the P and I constants are swit
165. ence torque end time OFF 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 20 00 Limiter P constant Integral time Driving gain Braking gain Digital 1 Digital 2 Digital 3 Unbalanced Load Compensation Operation Activation time ASR P constant ASR I constant APR P constant APR D gein Filter Time Constant for Detected Speed Reserved 1 Brake control by time 2 Brake control by output current Operation level O to 200 ON delay time OFF delay time Brake check time Startup delay time MC OFF delay time Door Control Door open starting speed Door open delay time Door open period 0 1 The data setting range is variable Referto Section 2 2 3 The unit changes depending on the setting of C21 4 Reserved for particular manufacturers Do not access this function code 2 18 o9 990 01 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Change when running Torque vector Default setting control ES s Software version which can be used Code L90 L91 L92 L93 L97 L98 L99 L108 L109 L110 L111 L112 L113 L114 L115 E117 L118 L119 L120 L121 L125 L130 L131 L132 L133 L143 L144 L145 L146 L147 2 4 Function Code Tables Change Torque Software Data Default 3 Data setting range Increment Unit when f i vector version which N copying setting running i control can be used PG Error Detection
166. eneiumimgdmcin T 114 1114 SW52 3 MC control Run command activated LN lt 115 1115 PTD Pole tuning done 116 1116 DSD Detection speed direction N 121 1121 TDCL Travel direction changes lifetime early waming s zm PTD Z PdewnmgdwewiweeetIsgu N Wr ran LO eelY wedon SSCS Ws zm LCF ___Loadcel fulload detection SSCS Ws my LCO _Loadcelloveroaddetecton SSCS 141 1141 CLOT Customizable logic output signal 1 142 1142 CLO2 Customizable logic output signal 2 143 1143 CLOZ Customizable logic output signal 3 144 1144 CLO4 Customizable logic output signal 4 145 1145 CLOS Customizable logic output signal 5 v 146 1146 CLO6 Customizable logic output signal 6 v 147 1147 CLO7 Customizable logic output signal 7 148 1148 CLO8 Customizable logic output signal 8 149 1149 CLO9 Customizable logic output signal 9 150 1150 CLO10 Customizable logic output signal 10 v 2 6 Software version which can be used 2 4 Function Code Tables Change Data Torque Software i Data Default ii H Code Data setting range Increment Unit when E format vector version which copying setting running No control can be used E30 Speed Arival FAR Hysteresis 0 00 to 6000 Equivalent with 0 00 to 200 00 Hz Variable 14 37 E31 Speed Detection FDT Detection level 0 00 to 6000 Equivalent with 0 00 to 200 00 Hz Variable E3
167. equivalent OPC PS or OPC PSH Synchronous motor Sinusoidal differential voltage 1 Vp p Sinusoidal differential voltage 1 Vp p SIN COS HEIDENHAIN ERN1387 or its equivalent BiSS C Kubler Sendix5873 or its equivalent OPC PR OPC PS or OPC PSH Synchronous motor Synchronous motor Sinusoidal differential voltage 1 Vp p SSI HEIDENHAIN ECN1313 or its equivalent OPC PS or OPC PSH Synchronous motor L02 Sinusoidal differential voltage 1 Vp p Hiperface SICH SRS50 or its equivalent OPC PSH Synchronous motor Pulse Encoder Resolution L02 specifies the resolution of the pulse encoder to be used for speed detection Improper setting of the resolution brings the indefinite detection of the speed and magnet pole position making accurate speed and vector controls impossible Data setting range 360 to 60000 P R 2 136 2 3 Overview of Function Code L03 Magnetic Pole Position Offset Tuning L04 Magnetic Pole Position Offset Offset angle L03 specifies the tuning type of the magnetic pole position offset Data for L03 Function Disable tuning Reserved for particular manufacturers Reserved for particular manufacturers Enable tuning with motor stopped c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Enable tuning with motor rotation Before doing tuning set up the following function code data Function
168. er XOR function with 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer Set priority flip flop with 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer 60 to 65 Reset priority flip flop General purpose timer Reset priority flip flop with 2 inputs and I output plus general purpose timer 70 72 73 Rising edge detector General purpose timer Rising edge detector with 1 input and 1 output plus general purpose timer This detects the rising edge of an input signal and outputs the ON signal for 5 ms 1 80 82 83 Falling edge detector General purpose timer Falling edge detector with 1 input and 1 output plus general purpose timer This detects the falling edge of an input signal and outputs the ON signal jor ms 1 90 92 93 Rising amp falling edges detector General purpose timer Rising and falling edge detector with I input and I output plus general purpose timer This detects both the falling and rising edges of an input signal and outputs the ON signal for 5 ms 1 Equals the task cycle 2 ms for a task cycle of 2 ms 5 ms for 5 ms 10 ms for 10 ms and 20 ms for 20 ms 2 108 2 3 Overview of Function Code Logic function block Description Hold function of previous values of 2 inputs and 1 output plus general purpose timer If the hold control signal is OFF the logic function block outputs input signals if it is ON the logic function block retains the
169. er shutdown detection TI Mode selection H74 Speed Agreement Oo a H75 O H76 Z H77 O H80 iw m o H81 Mode selection 1 00004 to FFFFi H94 Cumulative Run Time of Motor 0 to 9999 Cumulative run time can be modified or reset in units of CEE 10 hours H96 Check brake control select 0 BRKE is active 1 BRKE1 and BRKE2 are active H98 Protection Maintenance 00000000 to 11111111 0 to 255 01010001 Function 81 Bit 0 Lower the carrier frequency automatically Bit 1 Detect input phase loss Bit 2 Detect output phase loss Bit 3 Select life judgment criteria of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Detect DB Tr broken Bit 7 Detect thermistor disconnect for heat sink H99 Password Protection 00004 to FFFFH 00004 00004 Disable password protection 00014 to FFFFu Enable password protection H190 Terminal UVW Output order 0 Normal FWD UVW 1 Inverse FWD UWV 1 The data setting range is variable Refer to Section 2 2 E 3 The unit changes depending on the setting of C21 8 This function code is only for the torque vector control 2 11 B U codes Application Functions Customizable logic Change Torque Software P Data Default k Code Data setting range Increment Unit when vector version which copying setting running lo control can be used UOO Customizable logic Mode selection 0 Disable 1 Enable Custo
170. eration logical operation and a total of 200 steps can be used to configure a sequence E Modes Item Modes Terminal command Analog 1 input Digital 2 inputs Digital 1 input Analog 2 inputs Logical operation Numerical operation Selector hold etc signal Operation block counter etc 13 types comparator limiter Timer 5 types etc 25 types 12 types un Analog 1 output Output signal Digital 1 output Digital output Analog 1 output Number of steps 200 steps Customizable logic output 10 outputs Customizable logic processing time 2 ms max 10 steps 5 ms max 50 steps 10 ms max 100 steps 20ms max 200 steps Can be selected with a function code Customizable logic cancellation command 66 99 Customizable logic timer cancellation command 66 C Allows to stop all the customizable logic operations by assigning CLC to a general purpose input terminal and turning it ON It is used when you want to deactivate the customizable logic temporarily Resets the timer counter and all the previous values used in customizable logic by assigning CLTC to a general purpose input terminal and turning it ON It is used when a customizable logic 1s changed or if you want to synchronize it with external sequence Note If you use the customizable logic cancellation command and customizable logic timer cancellation command the inverter can unintentio
171. ere is a blackout one possible solution to rescue trapped people in lift car is to perform a rescue operation by brake control In this case inverter will control motor s brake opening and closing in order to move the lift by load unbalance by gravity This solution is very useful in case of gearless motors both synchronous and asynchronous As gearless motors has no gear box the system becomes more reversible Also it is very useful in case of MRL installations Machine Room less where reaching the brake is not easy Rescue operation by brake control will move lift car by inertia In order to keep a safety operation inverter will monitor lift speed under this operation This function is not available under Torque Vector Control as motor speed cannot be monitored 2 179 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 E Rescue operation by brake control Speed limit L117 In this parameter maximum speed allowed during rescue operation by brake control is set Maximum speed limit is set in mm s As soon as lift reaches speed set in this parameter BRKS signal will turn to OFF While RBRK input is ON and lift speed is below this level RBRK signal will be ON E Rescue operation by brake control Apply time L118 When BRKS signal turns to OFF brake closes because lift speed reaches L117 level lift speed will decrease until 0 mm s When lift speed reaches level set on function code L108 timer L118 starts to count BRKS will turn
172. erstood that travel is finished LCO signal will go to OFF when travel is finished On the other hand because of a faster reaction an inverter alarm can be selected When inverter is in alarm mode it disables output circuit current and brake is applied This behavior can be set on function code L143 On figure 4 overload detection with LCO alarm is shown 2 191 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Speed 4 mm s Torque A L147 EN1 amp EN2 Run command FWD REV Reset ME ON Mechanical brake Lco o LCO alarm NN k gt L133 02s Figure 4 Overload detection with LCO alarm L132 1 As it can be observed as soon as BRKS signal goes to ON L144 timer starts to count On the other hand as soon as mechanical brake opens torque output current increases but some time is needed to stabilize torque at zero speed When L144 timer is elapsed because torque is over L147 level output function LCO is going to ON state After 0 2 s in order to make sure brake is closed before current is removed LCO alarm is issued L198 Operation setting switch 1 Set L198 bits according to inverter operation Bit 7 Bit 6 i i i i Bit 1 Function detection Masked Ground parameters fail depending detection on set cancel control mode Short the carrier frequency cancel Data 0 Enable Enable Disable Disable Data 1 Cancel
173. erter trips with alarm 75 L14 Creep Speed L15 Manual Speed Low L16 Low Speed L17 Middle Speed L18 High Speed L19 i 0 to 50 of max speed L20 L21 L22 L23 L24 L25 L26 L27 L28 L29 Short Floor Operation Holding time OFF 32767 Disable L30 Allowable speed L31 Elevator Parameter Speed L32 Over speed level 50 to 120 1 L33 Over speed timer 0 000 to 0 500 L34 Moving distance in creepless operation 1 The data setting range is variable Referto Section 2 2 3 The unit changes depending on the setting of C21 4 Reserved for particular manufacturers Do not access this function code 7 If the speed detection is effective it operates 2 17 Code L36 L37 L38 L39 L40 L41 L42 L49 L50 L51 L52 L54 L55 L56 L57 L58 L59 L60 L61 L62 L63 L64 L65 L66 L68 L69 L73 L74 L75 L76 L80 L81 L82 L83 L84 L85 L86 L87 L88 L89 Data setting range P constant at high speed I constant at high speed P constant at low speed I constant at low speed 0 001 to 1 000 Switching speed 1 0 00 to 6000 Switching speed 2 0 00 to 6000 Feed forward gain 0 000 to 10 000 Vibration Suppression Observer Gain OFF 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 1 00 Integral time 0 005 to 1 000 Load inertia 0 01 to 655 35 Start Control Mode 0 Enable speed start mode pase 1 Enable torque start mode 0 Analog 1 Digital 2 Pl control 3 DCP Startup time 0 00 to 1 00 Refer
174. es S01 S05 and S21 data is cleared When a communication error alarm occurs the bits assigned in function code S06 for operation command is cleared Clear operations of 1 and 2 above are performed 2 134 2 3 Overview of Function Code Bus function Mode selection Refer to H30 The inverter memory non volatile memory has a limited rewritable times 100 thousand to 1 million times If the count immoderately increases the data cannot be modified or saved causing a memory error z deyo If the data should frequently be overwritten via communication it can be written in the temporary memory instead of the non volatile memory This allows to save rewritable times to the non volatile memory which can avoid a memory error If y97 is set to 2 the data written in the temporary memory is stored All Saved in the non volatile memory SHd09 NOILONNA To change the y97 data it is necessary to press the 6o keys simultaneous keying y97 data Function Store into nonvolatile memory Rewritable times are limited Write into temporary memory Rewritable times are unlimited Store all data from temporary memory to nonvolatile memory After storing all data the y97 data return to 1 Loader Link Function Mode This is a link switching function for FRENIC Loader Setting the function code data y99 with the loader enable the loader to issue control commands and or run commands to the inverter
175. esets Rescue operation by brake control Speed limit 0 0 to 500 0 0 1 mm s Apply time 0 10 to 20 00 Speed detection delay time 0 00 to 3 00 oot 1 Short circuit control Mode 0 Short circuit always 1 Short circuit only under certain conditions Check time fo tote 10 0000 gor s vw v om UPS batteries minimum OFF 0 Disable operation level 20 to 220 200V series 30 to 440 400V series Emewewamaerps powesas OO o om E3 5 5 7 e Ee EAE 5 Theta compensationband Theta compensation band band 90 to 90 Theta compensation gain 0 0 to 1 0 pan eem Load cell function Overload mode selection 0 Continue running 1 LCO trip a 99 s E 5 powan SE LC1 detection level 0 00 to 200 0 LCF detection level 0 00 to 200 0 BONES LCO detection level 0 00 to 200 0 001 4 Reserved for particular manufacturers Do not access this function code 6 These function code are excepted from normal password protection and normal data copy function Dedicated TDC password and TDC data copy function are available 2 19 z deyo S302 NOILONNA Code L198 L199 L201 L202 L203 L204 L205 L207 L208 L209 L210 L211 L212 L213 L214 L215 L216 L218 L219 Change Data Torque Data Default Data setting range Increment Unit when f fomat vector copying setting running No
176. etting temperature L93 setting 3 C Trip level 4 y L93 setting Early warning ON level p Ux E i 3 C Early waming OFF level 4 MON Ee ee OH orr OFF 2 168 2 3 Overview of Function Code L98 Protecting operation selection switch E34 current detection operation level 1 E35 current detection1 timer z deyo Selecting the protecting function for inverter possibly Bit 6 Bit4 Bit3 Bit 1 Calculate ASR with ENOFF FAN Not ONE Not only speed signal Not Dave current Function during assigned continuance assigned command output assigned alarm _ Protecting during mode operation ULC Data 0 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Data 1 Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Default 1 0 0 0 0 Set 0 for an unused function battery operation S3QO09 NOILONNA E Over torque current protecting operation Bit 0 The inverter is stop when reference torque current of the inverter exceeds the over torque current detection level E34 and the reference torque current continues longer than the period specified by over torque current detection time E35 The state is reset when after the inverter stop Torque current instruction value 0 ALM GE In case of vector control with PG for synchronous motor the motor torque current is r
177. etting value is cleared to 0 1 to 200 set the step No to monitor when powered off Monitor method Monitor method Function code Data TS X89 customizable logic Digital I O data for the step defined in U91 Communication digital I O only for monitoring X90 customizable logic Data of the timer counter value for the step defined in U91 timer monitor only for monitoring X91 customizable logic Analog input 1 data for the step defined in U91 analog input 1 only for monitoring X92 customizable logic Analog input 2 data for the step defined in U91 analog input 2 only for monitoring X93 customizable logic Analog output data for the step defined in U91 analog output only for monitoring 2 127 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA B Cancel customizable logic CLC function codes E01 to E08 Data 80 Customizable logic operations can temporarily be disabled so that the inverter can be operated without the customizable logic s logical circuit and timer operation for example during maintenance CLC Function OFF Customizable logic enabled according to U00 setting ON Customizable logic disabled Note If you turn ON the customizable logic cancellation signal CLC a sequence by the customizable logic is cleared which can suddenly start operation depending on the settings Ensure the safety and check the operation before switching the signal Bi Clear all customizable
178. f a deceleration command an S curve operation starts for finishing the current acceleration 2 After completion of the S curve operation the current speed is kept for the short floor operation holding time L29 3 After the holding time the inverter decelerates in the specified S curve operation L29 Short floor operation Holding time Speed L24 S curve ERN um 6 deceat EE 124 S curve ds Soja tus nado eid so maltese yaw INR tamea selling 6 E12 Acceleration deceleration time 5 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Allowable speed E13 Acceleration j deceleration time 6 L25 S c ve setting 7 w S curve setting 8 L28 S curve Creep speed Y seing 10 Zero speed Time 19 S curve setiing 1 DN L28 S curve setting 10 up r n tuct 7 c E C c x Zero Sheed High speed Creep speed Zero speed command command command command In case of Reference speed final gt Allowable speed L30 and Holding time L29 0 00 when a deceleration command is entered 1 Upon receipt of a deceleration command an S curve operation starts for finishing the current acceleration 2 After completion of the S curve operation the inverter decelerates in the specified S curve operation for the creep speed Speed L24 S curve seting6 High speed amp L24 S curve setting 6 L25 S curve L3
179. f time OFF 0 Always OFF 1 to 30 Automatic OFF after specific minutes from last key in K03 Backlight brightness control O L to 10 L K08 Status Display Hide Selection 0 Hide T O EHEPBPPE K15 Status Display Hide Selection 0 Numeric values 2x programable sub monitors Ee ee K16 Sub monitor 1 K17 Sub monitor 2 1 Reference speed Final 3 Reference speed pre ramp 4 Motor speed 6 Elevator speed 9 Elevator speed mm s 13 Output current 14 Output voltage 18 Calculated torque 19 Input power 28 Reference torque 29 Torque bias balance adjustment Offset BTBB 30 Torque bias gain adjustment BTBG K20 Bar chart 1 K21 Bar chart 2 K22 Bar chart 3 1 Reference speed Final 13 Output current 14 Output voltage 18 Calculated torque 19 Input power 28 Reference torque 29 Torque bias balance adjustment Offset BTBB 30 Torque bias gain adjustment BTBG K23 Traveling direction display 0 FWD UP direction 1 REV UP direction K91 lt key shortcut selection 0 OFF Disable K92 gt key shortcut selection 11 to 99 Enable shortcut function to each display mode For example 21 means PRG gt 2 gt 1 5 It is indicated depending on reference speed final Default Table F11 E34 E37 P03 FRNOO06LM2A 4 2 20 kW 5 50 A 3 40 A 6 82 96 9 91 96 FRNOO10LM2A 4 3 70 kW 9 00 A 5 70 A 5 54 96 8 33 96 FRNOO15LM2A 4_ 5 50 kW 13 50 A 8 40 A 4 05 11 72 FRNOO1
180. frequency Applicable Thermal time for motor motor rating constant characteristic factor kW Factory default Characteristic factor 76 f2 f3 a2 5 5 to 11 kW 95 85 18 5 22 kW 100 2 36 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Overload detection level F11 F11 specifies the level at which the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated Data setting range 0 00 Disable 1 to 20096 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the inverter In general set F11 to the allowable continuous drive current of the motor when driven at the rated speed i e 1 0 to 1 1 multiple of the rated current of the motor To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set F11 to 0 00 E Thermal time constant F12 F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor The time constant refers to the time required for the electronic thermal overload protection to detect a motor overload when the current of 15096 of the overload detection level specified by F11 has flown continuously Data setting range 0 5 to 75 0 min Example When F12 is set at 5 0 5 minutes As shown below the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm condition Alarm OL1 when the output current of 15096 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for 5 minutes The actual activation time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be
181. ft start time if it 1s different than zero This function doesn t operate when value set is 0 00s In case of Torque Vector control As soon as IGBT gates are ON DC braking at start operation starts Brake will open as well BRKS to ON When this time is elapsed motor accelerates to starting speed according to soft start time if it is different than zero This function doesn t operate when value set is 0 00s This function is enabled only in multi step speed command F01 0 or An analog speed command not reversible FO1 1 Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s LL Refer to page 2 2 for the control mode of the inverter B Soft start time H65 This function code specifies the acceleration time from zero speed to starting speed F23 The soft start can reduce an impact to the load at the start of running Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 s 2 39 z deyo S3QO09 NOILONNA E Start control mode L52 The soft start is available in two start control modes Speed start and torque start modes L52 selects either start control mode Start control mode L52 Multistep speed command F01 0 Analog speed command Not reversible F01 1 Analog speed command Reversible 2 F01 2 Speed start mode Y Y N 4 L52 0 Torque start mode L52 1 l Including keypad command operations and jogging operation 2 Including commands entered via a communications link 3 F
182. gh speed Ing L25 S curve setting 7 E13 Acceleration deceleration time 6 E12 Acceleration X deceleration time 5 L27 S curve setting 9 C d ee pispee T ANDER L26 S curve setting 8 L27 S curve Stop speed Ce Ne SEM ae de me mes ob E Lr setting 9 Zero speed Time lt E15 Acceleration deceleration time 8 H67 Stop speed Holding time FWD Zero speed High speed Creep speed Stop Output shut command command command command down 2 32 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Analog speed command Enabling an analog speed command F01 1 or 2 and assigning a speed command to terminal 12 E61 1 or 2 or V2 V2 function E63 1 or 2 run the inverter by analog voltage Enabling an analog speed command F01 1 or 2 and assigning a speed command to terminal V2 Cl function E62 1 run the inverter by analog current These inputs are added Refer to the block diagram below Selecting an analog speed command cannot invoke an S curve operation It disables a multistep speed command When Reference speed pre ramp lt Stop speed or F01 1 the reference speed pre ramp of 0 00 r min or below will be regarded as 0 00 r min The acceleration deceleration times specified by F07 and F08 apply respectively The inverter will linearly decelerate however in accordance with the time specified by E16 when a run command is turned off during running Exception is linear deceleration for the time specified by E16 when a run command
183. gnal 3 144 1144 Customizable logic output signal 4 145 1145 Customizable logic output signal 5 146 1146 Customizable logic output signal 6 147 1147 Customizable logic output signal 7 148 1148 Customizable logic output signal 8 149 1149 Customizable logic output signal 9 150 1150 Customizable logic output signal 10 2 58 2 3 Overview of Function Code B Inverter running RUN Function code data 0 This output signal is used to tell the external equipment whether the inverter is running Turning the inverter main circuit output gate ON or OFF switches the RUN signal ON or OFF respectively This signal is also OFF when the motor is being tuned If this signal is assigned in negative logic Active OFF it can be used as a signal indicating inverter being stopped E Speed arrival FAR Function code data 1 This output signal comes ON when the difference between the detected speed and reference speed pre ramp comes within the allowable error zone specified by E30 When the inverter s run command is OFF this output signal also comes OFF For details refer to the description of function code E30 Speed Arrival E Speed detected FDT Function code data 2 Speed detected FDT2 Function code data 31 These output signals FDT or FDT2 come ON when the detected speed exceeds the speed detection level specified by E31 or E36 and
184. he mode of L07 Doing so could cause an accident or injuries 2 139 Filter Time Constant for Reference Speed Final L09 specifies the filter time constant for the reference speed final to be applied after the S curve ramp control which reduces an impact produced at rapid acceleration deceleration Data setting range 0 000 to 0 100 s Filter Time Constant for Detected Speed L10 specifies the filter time constant for a detected speed Data setting range 0 000 to 0 100 s L11 to L18 Multistep Speed Command Combination Zero Speed to High Speed F01 Speed Command L11 to L18 combine commands SS7 SS2 and SS4 assigned to general purpose input terminals with speed commands zero speed C04 to high speed C11 Data setting range 00000000 to 00000111 LL Refer to the description of function code F01 for details L19 to L28 S curve Setting 1 to 10 F01 Speed Command L19 to L28 specify S curve zones to be applied to operations driven by multistep speed commands with S curve acceleration deceleration The setting values are indicated in percentage to the maximum speed Data setting range 0 to 50 96 Lo LL Refer to the description of function code F01 for details L ShortFioor Operation Holdingtimey Short Floor Operation Holding time S Floor Operation Holding time Lao ShortFioor Operation Allowable speed Short Floor Operation Allowable speed Floor Operation Allowable
185. he operation quantity reference torque for foreknown factors can be obtained beforehand adding the quantity to the reference torque directly that is the feed forward control can provide a highly responsive control When a load inertia is foreknown the feed forward control 1s effective As shown on the next page the follow up speed from the detected speed to the reference one is definitely different depending upon whether the feed forward control is disabled and enabled To get the maximal effect it is necessary to well balance the feed forward gain L42 with the P and I constants L36 to L39 of the ASR 2 149 Speed Reference speed final Speed Reference speed final Detected speed Detected speed gt gt 0 Time 0 Time Torque output Torque output A Torque Torque command gt gt 9 Time 0 c Time FF control disabled FF control enabled only PI feedback control enabled PI feedback control enabled together The effect above can be obtained also by adjusting the P and I constants to speed up the response but it involves any demerits such as resonance of machinery and vibration noise L49 Vibration Suppression Observer Gain L50 Vibration Suppression Observer Integral time L51 Vibration Suppression Observer Load inertia L49 through L51 specify the mechanical inertia for the vibration suppression observer The observer runs the simulation model inside the inverter estimates
186. hen auto resetting is in progress L The auto resetting is specified by H04 and H05 Refer to the descriptions of function codes H04 and H05 for details about the number of resetting times and reset interval Bl Universal DO U DO Function code data 27 Assigning this output signal to an inverter s output terminal and connecting the terminal to a digital input terminal of peripheral equipment via the communications link RS485 or CAN allows the inverter to send commands to the peripheral equipment The universal DO can be used as an output signal independent of the inverter operation For the procedure for access to Universal DO via the communications link RS485 or CAN refer to the respective instruction manual E Overheat early warning OH Function code data 28 This output signal issues an overheat early warning before an overheat trip actually occurs due to the temperature on the inverter s heat sink OH1 or inside the inverter OH3 or due to an inverter overload OLU If this signal is turned ON take any appropriate measures such as stop of the inverter operation and enhancement of external cooling For details refer to the description of L93 Overheat Early Warning Level E Service life alarm LIFE Function code data 30 This output signal comes ON when it 1s judged that the service life of any capacitors reservoir capacitor in the DC link bus and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards a
187. hile the inverter is powered OFF To avoid causing system malfunctions by this interlock these signals to keep them ON using an external power source Furthermore the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 3 seconds after power on so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient period Terminals Y3A C to Y5A C and 30A B C use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent ON OFF switching Where a frequent ON OFF switching is required use transistor outputs Y1 and Y2 The service life of a relay is approximately 200 000 times if it is switched ON and OFF at one second intervals The table on the following page lists functions that can be assigned to terminals Y1 Y2 Y3A C to Y5A C and 30A B C To make the explanation simpler the examples shown below are all written for the normal logic Active ON 2 56 2 3 Overview of Function Code Function code data Active ON Active OFF Functions assigned 0 1000 Inverter running 1001 Speed arrival 1002 Speed detected 1003 Undervoltage detected 1010 Inverter ready to run 1012 MC control c Z O a O z Q J m Qo 1025 Cooling fan in operation 1026 Auto resetting 1027 Universal DO 1028 Overheat early warning 1030 Service life alarm 1031 Speed detected 1035 Inverter output ON 1037 Current detected 1038 Current detected 2 1052 Encode
188. his menu 3 4 4 4 Check Operational Status Op Monitor PRG gt 3 gt 1 This allows to check the inverter s operational status This can be used when confirming operational status during maintenance or on test runs Table 3 11 Display items in Op Monitor Category Details Reference speed pre ramp Reference speed pre ramp currently specified Hz Reference speed final Reference speed final commanded to the Automatic Speed Regulator ASR Hz Output frequency Frequency being output Hz Motor rotational speed Detected speed r min Elevator speed Detected speed mm s Output current Output current value A Output voltage Output voltage value V Calculated torque Calculated torque based on the motor rated torque being at 100 1 Power consumption Power consumption kW 3 19 o U ITI S d o zZ c eui Z O E im x r z N Category Details Output status Rotating forward REV Rotating reverse EXT Inverter applies DC voltage to the motor INT Inverter stops output Ramp status Acc During acceleration Dec During deceleration Const During constant speed lt Blank gt Stopped Motor type IM Induction motor asynchronous motor PMSM Permanent magnet synchronous motor Selected control mode PG IM Vector control with PG for IM PG PM Vector control with PG for PMSM TV Torqu
189. hort circuit control feedback SCCF Function code data 115 SCCF input function is used to get a feedback from the auxiliary contacts of the motor phases short circuit device mini contactor or power relay To feedback the status of the short circuit device is mandatory Feedback is needed in order to avoid that inverter enables IGBT gates before motor phases short circuit is removed In case that any digital output is programed with the function SCC and no input is programmed with the function SCCF inverter will trip Er6 For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L120 and L121 E Stand by mode STBY Function code data 117 When following conditions are met inverter switches to a Stand by mode STBY is ON Inverter is stopping No operation command and IGBT gates are OFF When inverter switches to Stand by mode following actions are taken RDY OFF Power supply to built in option is stopped in order to reduce power consumption Cooling fan is stopped The bypass contact of the charging circuit 73X is turned OFF Time diagram for STBY function is show below STBY ON RDY ON ON LV a 90oN 73X ome gt ON FAN ov ON Power supply ON ON to PG option 4 with PG option Communication ON initialization Communication ON Communication i Communication is disabled 15 is enabled It may take a time of maximum 2 seconds until inverter becomes ready to RUN when i
190. ic In normal logic only if A ON and B ON then C ON Otherwise C OFF Adder for 2 signals or F15 Zero limiter Prevents data X C c values C A B TW A B A B t If B is negative then C A B acting as a subtracter Detection point Shows a detection point for a value indicated in the frame at the checkpoint 9 ASR Contrelled Speed deyo 91901 IOHLINOO HO SINVHOVIO 42018 duuei eud peeds aoualajoy 1 2 Reference Speed pre ramp Command Generator 0 se owes 4 p NVO SUD S8r Su c LUD S8z SH L vg yreunue 1 104 0 puewwoo seq enbJo puewwios uny puewwos peeds 2 OOo oH Auejod uy uonejedo e qisje es pueuiuoo peeds seig anbio Bojpeuy fyetod noyym uongjedo e qisje 8 JON pueuiuoo peeds Jepeo DIN334 o xeu gox Cos l NVO i Oo xeu oox LOS c uod SgySd 4 l o xeu xxx OTI uod S87SY E L l xeu oxxx peeds ped ex woy BuIPSoT i uoloun uonejedo puewwoo l ull Jepeo ull peeds E20 suoneoiunuuo L 66f OXXX 0 H Jo o9 0 H tar x 901 23 uondo ped ex uonounj niniN OTNO a 069 689 Auejod ym uonejedo ajgisieney pueuiuoo peeds Aquejod 3noujiw uoge edo ejqis1e eJ JON pueuiuoo pe
191. ifficult to calculate the moving distance with Equations 1 and 2 given in Deceleration point programming and moving distance Tune up with the actual elevator is required 4 Increase the ASR gain In a creepless operation keeping Reference speed final Detected speed is ideal It is therefore necessary to increase the ASR gain to the extent that no hunting occurs with L36 to L42 5 Widen the S curve zone at the start of deceleration With the same reason as stated in 4 above to suppress the speed difference at the start of deceleration it is recommended that the S curve zone be set to 20 or more to the deceleration sequence 2 147 Notes for accurate landing in a creepless operation 1 Even if a creepless operation is programmed in accordance with the instructions given on the previous pages the landing position may not be level with a floor If it happens use L34 to adjust the moving distance 2 The moving distance accuracy in a creepless operation is not guaranteed since it has a relationship with the elevator speed The speed control accuracy is the maximum speed 0 01 to 0 01 Use the accuracy as a guide in programming a creepless operation 3 If it is not possible to accurately set the elevator speed L31 e g elevator specifications having decimal fractions any error will be produced between the actual moving distance and internally calculated one If it happens use L34 to adjust the moving distanc
192. ifies the delay time from when the BRKS OFF conditions are met until the BRKS signal is actually turned OFF Data setting range 0 00 to 100 00 s 2 160 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Brake check time L84 L84 specifies the allowable time for the BRKE signal to turn ON OFF after the BRKS signal is turned ON OFF If the ON OFF state of the BRKE signal does not match that of the BRKS signal within the time specified by L84 the inverter trips with alarm Er6 For confirming MC operation taking use of timer for confirming the condition of SW52 2 and CS MC Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s Refer to the descriptions of function codes L84 to L86 for details Brake control signal BRKS Setting 57 to any of the general purpose programmable output terminal by E20 to E24 and E27 assigns a BRKS signal to that terminal The BRKS signal is available in two modes specified by L80 The BRKS signal turns OFF when the time length specified by L83 elapses after the speed 2 stop speed drops below the stop speed independent of a run command Adjust the braking timing to match the running pattern If the BRKS signal turns OFF with a run command being ON the BRKS signal will no longer tum ON again even the ON conditions are met again To turn the BRKS signal ON again turn the run command OFF once Brake confirmation signal BRKE Setting 65 to any of the general purpose programmable input terminal by E01 to E08 E98 and
193. ime from the service life five years Capacity of main circuit Ca Current capacity of main circuit capacitor is shown using capacity capacitor P at time of shipment as 100 Shows as cumulative run time the product of the cumulative Life of electrolytic capacitor on PCB EneT amount of time during which a voltage has been applied to the 3 P electrolytic capacitor on the PCB times a coefficient to account for Powered life Target life of electrolytic capacitor on PCB ambient temperature conditions Shows the remaining life of the electrolytic capacitor on the PCB Remaining life is calculated by subtracting elapsed time from the service life five years Cumulative motor run time Shows the motor s cumulative run time Reverts to 0 after exceeding 99 990 hours and begins counting up again Number of startups Accumulates and shows the number of motor operations the number of times the inverter run command has been ON Reverts to 0 after exceeding 65 535 times and begins counting up again Interior temperature Real time value Int Shows the current temperature inside the inverter Maximum interior temperature Int max Shows the maximum temperature inside the inverter in one hour increments Heat sink temperature Real time value Fin Shows the current temperature of the heat sink inside the inverter Maximum heat sink temperature Fin max Shows the curren
194. imit input 2 selects the higher one automatically and outputs it This function has output limiters upper lower specified with two function codes The 1st function code provides the upper limit value and the 2nd one provides the lower one Lower limit Low selector Low selector function This function receives two inputs input 1 and input 2 selects the lower one automatically and outputs it This function has output limiters upper lower specified with two function codes The Ist function code provides the upper limit value and the 2nd one provides the lower one Average of inputs Average function This function receives two inputs input 1 and input 2 averages them and outputs the result This function has output limiters upper lower specified with two function codes The 1st function code provides the upper limit value and the 2nd one provides the lower one 2 115 z deyo S302 NOILONNA The block diagrams for each operation function block are given below The setting value for functions 1 and 2 is indicated with U04 and U05 2001 Adder 2002 Subtracter 2003 Multiplier U04 U04 U04 Input1 Output Input Output Input 1 x Output A U05 U05 U05 Input 2 Input 2 Input 2 2004 Divider 2005 Limiter 2006 Absolute value of inputs U04 U04 Input 1 Input 1 NM Output Input 1 NES
195. immediately stops the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarm Turning it OFF restarts the inverter E Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state alarm output for any alarm Turning it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state When you turn the RST command ON keep it ON for 10 ms or more This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation An alarm occurrence Inverter Turning alarm display ON and No alarm displayed running status holding alarm status Stop and ready to run OFF Alarm output ALM ON i Min 10 ms Reset alarm RST OFF ON OFF 2 50 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop displays the alarm OH2 and outputs the alarm relay for any alarm ALM The THR is self held and is reset when an alarm reset takes place Use a trip command from external equipment when you have to immediately shut down Tip the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation in a peripheral equipment E Enable jogging operation JOG Function code data 10 Turning this terminal command ON enables jogging operation For details refer to the description of function code C20 Jogging Speed E Enable communica
196. ing a motor with low efficiency like worm gear motor load variation between car and counterweight might not be detected In this case please set this level to detect RRD correctly C Tip Please follow the following procedure 1 With balance load run the elevator in up direction and observe the torque command at the constant speed 2 Run the elevator in down direction and observe the torque command at constant speed with same condition 3 Please set larger torque commnd to E39 2 69 LED Monitor Item selection E48 LED Monitor Speed monitor item E43 specifies the monitoring item to be displayed on the LED monitor of basic keypad TP E1U E LED monitor Item selection E43 Data for E43 Function Item to be displayed Description Speed monitor Selected by the sub item of function code E48 Output current Inverter output current expressed in RMS A Output voltage Inverter output voltage expressed in RMS V Calculated torque Reference torque based on the motor rated torque Input power Inverter s input power kW Reference torque Reference torque based on the motor rated torque Torque bias balance adjustment Offset BTBB Torque bias gain adjustment BTBG For adjustment of analog torque bias l n vector control with PG this item shows the reference torque Specifying the speed monitor E43 0 provides a choice of speed monit
197. ion Speed 30 00 r min Motor No of poles 20 Motor No load current 0 00A Motor R1 5 00 96 Stop Speed Holding time Speed Agreement Hysteresis 0 40 r min Pulse Encoder Selection 5 Pulse Encoder Resolution 2048 P R ASR P constant at high speed 2 5 ASR P constant at low speed 2 5 ASR Switching speed 1 6 00 r min ASR Switching speed 2 12 00 r min Unbalanced Load Compensation Operation Unbalanced Load Compensation ASR P constant 25 Unbalanced Load Compensation ASR I constant 0 005 s Unbalanced Load Compensation APR P constant 1 00 Brake Control OFF delay time Door Control Door open starting speed 50 00 r min 2 86 2 3 Overview of Function Code Auto resetting Times Auto resetting Reset interval H04 and H05 specify the auto resetting function Trip is released according to driving instruction OFF Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses of the inverter Alarm status Alarm on LED monitor Alarm status Alarm on LED monitor Zn Ds T OC1 0C2 0C3 Motor overheated OH4 overcurrent protection c es Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Overvoltage protection OV1 OV2 OV3 Motor overloaded OLI Heat sink overheated OH1 Inverter overloaded OLU Inverter overheated OH3 Undervoltage detected LV E Number of auto resetting times H04 H04 specifies the number of auto resetting times for automatically escaping the tripped
198. ion period s required from N1 to N2 2 29 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA Operation examples The following diagrams show operation examples given when the inverter runs by factory defaults of function codes L11 to L18 Changing those code data makes the relationship between terminal commands SSI SS2 SS4 and SS8 and the reference speed pre ramp selected different from the following diagrams Low speed Speed L20 S curve setting 2 L21 S curve setting 3 Low speed F08 Acceleration deceleration time 2 F07 Acceleration deceleration time 1 L28 S curve setting 10 Creep speed uS L26 S curve setting 8 Dun S curve setting 10 L19 S ing 1 Zero speed curve setting Ti E14 Acceleration deceleration time 7 os EN1 amp EN2 ON FWD SS1 Zero speed Low speed Creep speed Zero speed command command command command Middle speed Speed Middle speed L22 S curve setting 4 L23 S curve setting 5 E11 Acceleration deceleration time 4 E10 Acceleration L28 S curve setting 10 deceleration time 3 Creep speed L26 S curve setting 8 L28 S curve setting 10 L19 S curve setting 1 Zero speed E14 Acceleration deceleration time 7 Time FD Zero speed Middle speed Creep speed Zero speed command command command command 2 30 2 3 Overview of Function Code High speed Speed High speed L24 S curve setting 6 L25 S curve setting 7 E13 Acceleration dece
199. l the DRS is turned ON and the run command and inverter main circuit output gate are turned OFF 2 163 Speed Stop speed 0 H67 Stop speed Holding time Runcommand MEN es Termina EN e SW522 ee NEN 8 e 1L 5 output gate S lt gt L85 MC control L86 MC control Startup delay time MC OFF delay time MC Control Signal SW52 2 Timing Scheme E MC control 2 SW52 3 This signal is a logical sum OR gate of SW52 2 MC control and AX2 Run command activated The timing scheme is shown on the following figure Compared with SW52 2 even if EN terminal is OFF or BX terminal is ON SW52 3 comes ON and MC can be turned ON in such a condition Speed Stop speed 0 5 H67 Stop speed Holding time Run command O C NN s 7 5 Terminal EN a 0 SW52 3 SWS2 2 a NEM AX2 NES ee Inverter main circuit lt M O NENNEN sss output gate 2S L85 MC control L86 MC control Startup delay time MC OFF delay time MC Control Signal 2 W52 3 Timing Scheme E MC Operation confirmation CS MC is assigned to a general purpose programmable input terminal by setting 103 with E01 to E08 E98 and E99 This signal checks that the output side magnetic contactor works correctly Make the external circuit as if actual MC condition is ON this input signal CS MC becomes ON When SW52 2 and CS MC are the differernt con
200. le 2 Inverter supporting loader FRENIC loader Inverter supporting monitor function code editing test operation can be performed by connecting a computer with the FRENIC loader installed LL For the y codes setting refer to the function codes y01 to y20 3 Host equipments upper equipments Host equipments upper equipments such as PLC and controller can be connected to control and monitor the inverter Modbus RTU protocol or DCP protocol can be selected for communication 1 Modbus RTU is a protocol defined by Modicon 2 DCP is a protocol defined by KOLLMORGEN For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual E Station addresses y01 y11 Set the station addresses for the RS 485 communication The setting range depends on the protocol Protocol Broadcast Modbus RTU 1 to 247 Protocol for loader commands 1 to 255 DCP When specifying a value out of range no response is returned The settings to use inverter supporting loader should match with the computer s settings 2 129 z deyo S302 NOILONNA E Communications error processing y02 y12 Select an operation when an error occurs in the RS 485 communication The RS 485 errors are logical errors such as address error parity error and framing error transmission errors and disconnection errors the latter specified in y08 and y18 These errors occur only when the inverter is configured to receive the operation co
201. leration time 6 E12 Acceleration deceleration time 5 L28 S curve setting 10 Creep speed L26 S curve setting 8 L28 S curve L19 S curve setting 1 setting 10 Zero speed E14 Acceleration deceleration time 7 Time FWD SS1 SS2 Zero speed High speed Creep speed Zero speed command command command command Manual speed Low speed L20 S curve setting 2 Manual speed Low L21 S curve setting 3 F08 Acceleration deceleration time 2 F07 Acceleration deceleration time 1 L28 S curve setting 10 Preepspesd L26 S curve setting 8 L28 S curve L19 S curve setting 1 setting 10 Zero speed Time E14 Acceleration deceleration time 7 EN1 amp EN2 ON FWD ss4 Zero speed Manual speed Low Creep speed Zero speed command command command command 2 31 z deyo S3QO09 NOILONNA Manual speed Middle Speed Manual speed Middle Creep speed L22 S curve setting 4 L23 S curve setting 5 E11 Acceleration deceleration time 4 E10 Acceleration deceleration time 3 L28 S curve setting 10 L26 S curve setting 8 L28 S curve Zero speed L19 S curve setting 1 setting 10 E14 Acceleration deceleration time 7 Tine EN1 amp EN2 FWD SS1 SS2 SS4 Zero speed Manual speed Creep speed Zero speed command Middle command command command Creep speed to stop Speed L24 S curve setting 6 Hi
202. less than the stop speed it will not come ON The output signal FAR3 can be also assigned by setting 72 The FAR3 comes ON when the detected speed against the reference speed pre ramp is within the specified range This output signal is not affected by any run command The output signals DACC and DDEC can be also assigned by setting 73 and 74 respectively The DACC or DDEC comes ON depending on whether the motor is accelerating or decelerating by comparing the reference speed pre ramp with the detected speed These output signals during accelerating and decelerating are turned OFF according to the level of the speed arrival hysteresis specified by E30 SHd09 NOILONNA Tip When the output signals FAR DACC and DDEC are assigned the ON to OFF delay time can be specified by function code H75 in order to prevent chattering H75 can be used for the output signal DSAG Note When the torque vector control is selected reference speed final is used instead of detection speed Following is a timing chart for these output signals Speed Refference speed E30 2 67 Speed Detection FDT Detection level E36 Speed Detection 2 FDT Detection level Speed Detection FDT Hysteresis E31 E36 and E32 specify the speed detection level and hysteresis band width for the output signal FDT or FDT2 assigned to a general purpose programmable output terminal by any of E20 to E24 and E27 E Speed detection level
203. load calculation Unbalance load compensation ACR P constant Specify the ACR P constant to use in unbalanced load calculation Note When an UNBL command is assigned to any general purpose programmable input terminal be sure to enter a run command before entry of an UNBL command Entry of an UNBL preceding a run command does not perform unbalanced load compensation 2 157 z c Z O a O z Q Og m Qo In speed control Unbalanced load compensation requires keeping the reference speed pre ramp at 0 00 r min and releasing the brake during the period from the start of running to the completion of calculation that is during the activation timer setting specified by L66 If the reference speed pre ramp other than 0 00 r min is entered before the time length specified by L66 elapses unbalanced load compensation immediately starts During the time length L66 from the start of estimation of an unbalanced load the inverter holds zero speed with the zero speed control specified when unbalanced load compensation is enabled After the time length L66 the current reference torque value inside the inverter will be taken as a torque bias amount After that the inverter runs in speed control with the torque bias amount under ASR Speed High speed p Creep speed x I 0 Zero speed High Creep speed command command command command FWD SS1 ss2 SS4 UNBL
204. losed If the brake remains open more than time specified in L84 timer inverter trips bbE alarm Speed 0 EN ENT EN2 FWD SS SS2 SS4 RBrk BRKS BRKE WESINM BRKE2 imm 1 i Brakel Release Release 1 1 1 Brake2 Release i 1 i i Release Release Release i 8 l ON 85 ccc 5 Release 1 1 ALM i d i ors e o iS L84 SOS i L84 bbE alarm is not displayed L84 Lx EN 4 Figure 6 bbE alarm while motor is stopped and RBRK function is used As it can be observed in figure 6 somebody or something is opening the brake even inverter is not asking to do so In other words brake is manipulated even it should be closed In this case because RBRK input function is activated inverter is not tripping any alarm When RBRK input is activated inverter understands that brake is being opened by external means in order to rescue people from car As this is treated as an exceptional operation bbE alarm is not displayed E Brakes monitor according to UCM Clear bbE alarm H95 As explained before there is a specific alarm for this function bbE Also on alarm Er6 there is a SUB code related to this function In table 1 additional information for each alarm is shown Table 1 Alarms and SUB codes Alarm message displayed Description Possible causes Er6 H96 is set to 1 but Check that BRKE1 function is correctly set some settings
205. lost it is impossible to detect it This function can be used to keep more than the setting of P06 the output current When lift controller use ID or ID2 as brake release condition in case that the inveter control synchronous motor please use this function Tip By using the function it is possible that do confirmation for the connection between inverter and stopped synchronous motor ANWARNING Recommended value of P06 is less than 5 of the motor rated current when this function is used Otherwise injuries could occur E Magnetic pole position offset Bit 1 The tuning result by PPT is preserved or read LL Refer to the explanation of PPT for details 2 171 Stop speed E Initial torque bias and reference torque decreasing Bit 2 The following functions can be used when the function is enabling a Initial torque bias The operation of initial torque bias is the following Turning the inverter main circuit output gate ON to hold a reference torque bias It is set point of torque bias It is signed as A Reference torque bias starts initial torque bias It is signed as B which is calculated as follows L57 x 100 The reference torque bias is increased from B to A The time is a value of L55 B A A Torque bias analog input A A Set point of torque bias L57 x B A 100 A Initial torque Reference bias KIT S f bi torque bias A Set poi
206. ltage level L125 Detected speed S curve acce dece disabled 0 X X E17 E17 Run command PN Manual speed middle gt E Zero speed Zero speed The time of T1 changes depending on the voltage and capacity Refer to the delay time of specification 4 B Precautions 1 2 3 4 5 6 The battery power supply must be connected before BATRY is turned ON Alternatively connect the battery power supply at the same time as turning ON BATRY As shown above inverter operation is possible within the battery operation allowable zone There must be a delay of the T1 T2 period from when the BATRY MC and battery power supply are turned ON After that the inverter becomes ready to run The BATRY should not be turned ON as long as the voltage level is higher than the specified undervoltage level that is before the LV appears after a power failure Doing so blocks 73X to go OFF During battery operation avoid driving with a driving load and run the elevator with a balanced or regenerative load Low battery voltage cannot generate sufficient torque and it causes the motor to stall These precautions are given for an inverter operation with an extremely low voltage that prevents normal operation For battery operation with a high voltage such as 600 V for 400 V class series inverter do not use the BATRY but run the inverter in a normal manner at a low speed and be careful with th
207. m During ACC Alarm status Cause Remainin GO ProgramMenufg Figure 3 2 Principal displaying item on the LCD monitor 3 3 o 9 m S d o z c eui Z O Aa x r z N Table 3 3 Icons on the LCD Monitor Status icons that show the running status run command sources and various icons Running status rotation direction Running forward Running reverse Run command source External terminals Communications link Keypad in local mode Password protection state Locked with password 1 Function code data change is prohibited Lock being released Password being canceled temporally Running status Travel direction Appears during Programming mode and Alarm mode Traveling upward Traveling downward STOP Travel direction indicator Running status No run command entered or inverter stopped Run command entered or during inverter output Status messages Low Supply Volt Travel direction v Appears during Running mode Traveling upward Traveling downward Table 3 4 Status messages on the LCD Monitor Appearance condition Run command is turned ON at low supply voltage EN Off Run command is turned ON when EN1 and or EN2 are being released BX Active AutoReset ALM Run command is turned ON when BX command is being turned ON Inverter is trying waiting to reset the al
208. m their factory default values are accompanied by an asterisk Selecting the function code and pressing key allows you to refer to or change the displayed function code data The Screen transition in this screen is almost same as in 3 4 3 1 However the function code lost screen is as shown below S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 2 gt 2 2 F Fundamental f 0 cHG OK 9 0 Mutti 03 1800 00r min 1500 00r min PEC mead Gio Function code number Function code data Changed marker Figure 3 9 Checking function code data display sample 3 4 3 3 Checking changed function code data Changed Data Only function codes that have been changed from their factory default values are shown Selecting the function code and pressing key allows you to refer to or change the displayed function code data S Spd 1450r min PRG 2 3 2 F Fundamental 1800 00r min 1 00s EH 2 00r min E Extension YA 117 STBY Changed Data Figure 3 10 Checking changed function code data display sample 3 14 3 4 Programming Mode 3 4 3 4 Copying function code data Data Copy This menu provides Read Write Verify and Check operation enabling the following applications The keypad can hold three sets of function code data in its internal memory to use for three different inverters a Reading function code data already configured in an inverter and then writing that function code dat
209. mand FWD or REV is turned ON the inverter increases a reference torque bias value up to the specified torque bias for the time length specified by L55 Once the reference torque bias value reaches the specified one the bias setting applies Note that you specify the time length required from the start of running until the torque changes from 0 to 100 of the motor rated torque Analog input Torque bias or PI output FIIDREV NEINENM NENLINENM Tig Torque bias setting upon Reference activating H TB i E torque bias i i ht ji 3 l FWDIREV ON l i increases torque bias to the setting Cse me keep Wade Rated torque Torque bias reference value Rated torque x Startup time L55 Turning ON H TB then FWDIREV Turning ON FWD REV then H TB Note When the PI torque bias L54 2 is set it is necessary to turn on the FWD or REV earlier than H TB 2 154 2 3 Overview of Function Code Torque Bias Reference torque end time L66 Unbalanced Load Compensation Activation time L67 Unbalanced Load Compensation Holding time L56 sets up the reference torque end timer whose functional property differs whether in speed control Data setting range 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 20 00 s In speed control During the shutdown sequence in speed control the inverter decreases a reference torque value held internally to 0 taking time specified by L56 for deceleration N
210. means coated ropes or belts This function is available only in combination with Multi function keypad TP A 1 LM2 option E Travel direction counter Password setting L109 In this function code a password for TDC can be set In other words until password is not defined in L109 TDC function remains disabled Data for L109 0000h No password Function disabled 0001h FFFFh Password setting range As soon as password is defined L109 returns to default setting value 0000h Note After defining a password TDC function has to be locked To do so please turn the power supply of the inverter OFF wait until keypad is not lighted and switch ON again E Travel direction counter Password unlock L110 After TDC function has been enabled by setting a password in L109 password can be set on this function code to unlock menus 2 Setting 4 Set PW and 5 TDC Copy Data for L111 Action 0000h No password Function locked 0001h FFFFh Password setting range As soon as password is defined L110 returns to default setting value 0000h Note After modify TDC function parameters make sure function is locked again To do so please turn the power supply of the inverter OFF wait until keypad is not lighted and switch ON again 2 177 x c Z O a O z Q Og m Q E Travel direction counter Travel limit L111 Maximum travel direction changes allowed are set in this
211. milar correction signal of AB Z encoder PTD Z signal is set to ON When one of the following condition is met these signals are reset The inverter power off The inverter tripped during the magnetic pole position tuning Magnetic pole position tuning is canceled before ending F42 POI LOI or L02 is changed These signals show the status of magnetic pole position tuning as following State of the magnetic pole position tuning Magnetic pole position tuning is not completed successfully Combination not possible Although the pole position tuning has been completed successfully Z phase pulse has not been detected correction is not performed Magnetic pole position tuning is completed successfully the correction by Z phase pulse is also completed successfully E Detected speed direction DSD Function code data 116 This signal shows the direction of the detection speed The detection speed is assumed as positive in FWD operation and negative in REV operation when the stop speed F25 is considered to be a maximum hysteresis width and if the detection speed is bigger than F25 DSD is turned ON If the detection speed is smaller than F25 DSD is turned off The state is maintained when the detection speed is inside the width of hysteresis vetectea Speed Stop Speed F25 0 Stop Speed F25 Hold Hold DSO M O a 2 64 2 3 Overview of Function Code B Tr
212. mits the reference speed pre ramp at 0 or 100 of the maximum speed Analog input Analog speed command Filter time for 12 12 Offset Gain constant E61 NE N a wearer 2 Limit Polarity l X2 Reference speed 10 V 100 FTN pre ramp No polarity C31 C32 C33 C 0 to 10V 0 to 100 i Analog input for C1 V2 SW4 C1 Ee OO x gt a CO 1 HO 4 to 20 mA 0 to 100 E pom i or 63 C97 ED o4 46 Polarity Analog input 10 V 100 for V2 No polarity sw4 v2 o o imi Oto10V 0to100 L5 53 l fo oie E i HA X tou D torque bias C41 Q3 Simplified Block Diagram of Analog Inputs 2 79 E Operation examples The following graphs show operation examples using the gain and offset effects Current input or non polar voltage input makes shaded areas invalid as 0 V or 4 mA and polar voltage input makes the shaded areas valid Adjust gain with 096 offset Analog input command 20096 reference point 100 reference _ 200 gain Point Adjust offset with 100 gain Analog input command 200 reference point 100 reference point 50 offset 0 offset Adjust offset and gain Analog input command 200 reference 1 point 100 reference pointt 80 gain and 60 offset 100 gain and 0 offset
213. mizable logic operation ECL alarm occurs when the value is changed from 1 to 0 during the inverter running U01 Customizable logic Step 1 0 No function assigned IRE Block selection Digital 10 to 15 Through output Timer 20 to 25 Logical AND Timer 30 to 35 Logical OR Timer 40 to 45 Logical XOR Timer 50 to 55 Set priority flip flop Timer 60 to 65 Reset priority flip flop Timer 70 72 73 Rising edge detector Timer 80 82 83 Falling edge detector Timer 90 92 93 Rising amp falling edges detector Timer 100 to 105 Hold Timer 110 Increment counter 120 Decrement counter 130 Timer with reset input Timer function Least significant digit O to 5 _0 No timer _1 On delay timer _2 Off delay timer _3 Pulse 1 shot _4 Retriggerable timer _5 Pulse train output Analog 2001 Adder 2002 Subtracter 2003 Multiplier 2004 Divider 2005 Limiter 2006 Absolute value of input 2007 Inverting adder 2008 Variable limiter 2009 Linear function 2051 to 2056 Comparator1 to 6 2071 2072 Window comparator1 2 2101 High selector 2102 Low selector 2103 Average of inputs Digital Analog 4001 Hold 4002 Inverting adder with enable 4003 4004 Selector 1 2 4005 LPF Low pass filter with enable 4006 Rate limiter with enable 5000 Selector 3 5100 Selector 4 6001 Reading function code 6002 Writing function code 6003 Temporary change of function code 2 12 2 4 Function Code Tables
214. mm Y 66 1066 DRS Force to decelerate 67 1067 UNBL Start unbalance load compensation N 69 PPT Start magnetic pole position offset tuning N 80 1080 CLC Customizable logic cancel v 81 1081 CLTC Customizable logic all timer clear 98 FWD Run forward 99 REV Run reverse 100 NONE No function assigned 101 1101 THR2 Enable extemal alarm trip 2 102 1102 RTDEC Start reference torque decreasing 103 1103 CS MC Check status MC operation S302 NOILONNA lt lt J 22444 108 1108 CAN LE CAN link enable 111 1111 BRKET Check brake control 1 112 1112 BRKE2 Check brake control 2 114 RBRK Enable rescue operation by means of brake control 115 1115 SCCF Short circuit control feedback 117 1117 STBY Stand by mode Note In the case of THR DRS THR2 data 1009 1066 1101 are for normal logic and 9 66 101 are for negative logic respectively E10 Acceleration Deceleration 0 00 to 99 9 Variable Acceleration Deceleration time is ignored at 0 00 bd E11 Acceleration Deceleration Va E12 Acceleration Deceleration E13 Acceleration Deceleration E14 Acceleration Deceleration Variable EM E15 Acceleration Deceleration Va E16 Acceleration Deceleration E17 Acceleration Deceleration Time 10 E18 1 FWD REV 2 SS1 82 584 5S8 3 FWD REVISS1 882 584 588 Es fr mopoon I9 NT YL OO TT 2 5 Code E20 E21 E22 E23
215. mmand or frequency command via the RS 485 communication If the operation command or frequency command is not issued via the RS 485 communication or when the inverter is stopped the system does not determine an error y02 y12 data Function Displays the RS 485 communication error Er8 for y02 ErP for y12 and immediately stops the operation trip by alarm Operates for a period specified in the error Er io s oj y ae ns r8 for y02 ErP for y12 and stops displays the RS 485 communication error the operation trip by alarm Retries the communication for a period specified in the error process timer y03 y13 and if the communication is recovered the operation continues Displays the RS 485 communication error Er8 for y02 ErP for y12 if the nr EE is not recovered and immediately stops the operation trip by alarm Continues the operation 1f a communication error occurs For details refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual E Error process timer y03 y13 Sets the error process timer as explained above for the communications error processing parameters y02 y12 Refer also to the section of disconnection detection time y08 y18 Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 s E Baud rate y04 y14 Sets the transmission baud rate y04 and y14 data Function For inverter supporting loader via RS 485 Match the value with the computer setting 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps E Da
216. motor 0 01 0 01 to 15 00 aM P60 Armature resistance Rs 0 000 to 50 000 N P62 Armature q axis reactance Xs 0 000 to 50 000 y N Pes interphase inductive voltage EJotos0o 3 v n v o T3 T8 8 This function code is only for the torque vector control 2 9 B H codes High Performance Functions Change Torque Software Data Default z Code Data setting range Increment Unit when vector version which copying setting running E control can be used H03 Data Initialization Disable initialization Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults vector control for IM 2 Initialize all function code data to vector control for PMSM 3 Initialize all function code data to open loop control for IM Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults without Link parameters Initialize customizable logic parameters H04 i 0 Disable Times Bl Times 1 to 10 Auto reset number of times H05 Reset interval 0 5 to 20 0 H06 Cooling Fan Control Auto 0 0 Automatic ON OFF depending upon temperature ENTM OFF 32767 Disable Always ON 0 5 to 10 0 min OFF by timer H26 PTC NTC Thermistor 0 Disable 1 Enable Upon detection of PTC the inverter immediately trips and stops with displayed 2 Enable Upon detection of PTC the inveter continues running while outputting alarm signal TMH 3 Enable Upon detection of NTC the inveter detects mo
217. mpensation band is used for a better accuracy on Vector control with peripheral PG Synchronous motor Please don t modify this parameter default setting is the optimal value E Theta compensation gain lower limiter L133 Theta compensation gain lower limit is used for a better accuracy on Vector control with peripheral PG Synchronous motor Please don t modify this parameter default setting is the optimal value qj For additional information about Vector control with peripheral PG Synchronous motor refer to related Application Note AN Lift2 0005v100EN 2 188 2 3 Overview of Function Code L143 Load cell function Overload mode selection L144 Load cell function Timer L145 Load cell function LC1 detection level L146 Load cell function LCF detection level L147 Load cell function LCO detection level In case of very reversible lift installations with synchronous motor torque can be used to guess load inside car in other words torque is proportional to the load On the other hand nowadays lift manufacturers are installing load cells on the lifts in order to detect load inside car As it is stated in EN 81 1 1998 A3 2009 14 2 5 Load control movement of the lift has to be prevented in case of overload Load cell is a device which increment cost of the lift and needs to be adjusted By means of load cell function installation of load cell can be avoided in certain cases ch c Z O a O z Q O i
218. n code F01 2 78 2 3 Overview of Function Code C31 to C33 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Gain Filter time constant C36 to C38 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 C1 function Offset Gain Filter time constant C41 to C43 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 V2 function Offset Gain Filter time constant These function codes specify the gain offset and filter time constant for analog input terminals E Offset C31 C36 and C41 These function codes specify the offset adjustment for analog input voltage or current Data setting range 100 0 to 100 0 c Z O a O Z Q Og m Qo B Gain C32 C37 and C42 These function codes specify the gain adjustment for analog input voltage or current Data setting range 0 00 to 200 00 96 Bi Command values The following formula indicates the relationship between the command value gain 96 offset 9 and analog input 90 Command value Analog input Offset x Gain x Reference value Where the analog input 100 to 100 corresponds to 10 to 10 V in voltage input and 0 to 100 to 4 to 20 mA in current input The table below lists the reference values and limits Commands Reference values Limits Reference speed pre ramp Maximum speed Maximum speed x 100 to 100 Reference torque bias 100 of motor rated torque Motor rated torque x 200 to 200 Setting F01 to 1 Analog speed command Not reversible li
219. n to select analog input 1 and S0001 Step No Not to SO200 based on digital input 1 required 2 119 Block selection U01 etc Function block Reading function codes Writing function codes Description Function to read the content of arbitrary function code Use the 1st function code such as U04 to specify a function code group and the 2nd one such as U05 to specify the last two digits of the function code number For the function code settings refer to Configuration of function codes in page 2 126 Both input 1 and input 2 are not used Data formats that can be read correctly are as follows the values are restricted between 9990 and 9990 and for 29 20000 is indicated as 100 1 21 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 22 24 29 35 37 45 61 67 68 74 92 and 93 Data formats other than the above cannot be read correctly Do not use any other format This function writes the value of input 1 to a function code U171 to U175 on the volatile memory RAM when the input 2 becomes 1 True When the input 2 becomes 0 False this function stops to write to the function code U171 to U175 and maintains the previous value The value of input 1 is stored to the non volatile memory EEPROM when the inverter detects undervoltage Because the access arbitration from some steps at a time Is not possible only one step is allowe
220. nally start because the speed command is unmasked depending on the structure of the customizable logic Be sure to turn OFF the operation command to turn it ON A physical injury may result A damage may result 2 104 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Block diagram gt D ear Analog outa terminals Internal input Internal output FMA terminals N signal signal n 12 FSET NP FOUT1 c r aT mm a Z c1 FSET FMA v2 T BIAS Iriverter four Application m Process 2 Q O O m 09 Customizable logic Step 1 Output Input 1 L U02 Oberationblock signal U71 o U01 U04 ah ea U05 0001 Input 2 CLO1 U81 CLO2 U82 Input 1 qt M o input 27 57 s0002 Terminal command input 1 Step 3 Customizable u7 E E SS a Suse Open 3 U73 logic Diss ON i ct s0003 Output signal 0001 por CLO3 U83 2 CLOA Input 2 TU Step 4 U74 E YCLO4U84 r Input 1 ted Operation H block H H Input 2 o H i L L tep 5 t 4 coto Input 1 Operation U90 a block Y r 2 U73 Input 27 o E t ao c7 c7 Nm H i p Disable 2 5 1 I II SO001 H19 Step 200 i t sooo 2 4 0 i 5 i E cdm
221. nce speed final commanded to the Automatic Speed Regulator ASR Hz Detected speed Hz Output current Output current A Output voltage Output voltage V Magnetic pole position offset angle Magnetic pole position offset angle deg at that time Calculated torque Calculated torque Reference torque Value based on the motor rated torque being at 100 Reference torque current Value based on the motor rated current being at 100 Cumulative run time Number of startups Shows cumulative time inverter s main power has been on Reverts to 0 after exceeding 655 350 hours and begins counting up again Accumulates and shows the number of motor operations the number of times the inverter run command has been ON Reverts to 0 after exceeding 6 553 500 times and begins counting up again DC link bus voltage Shows DC link bus voltage of inverter s main circuit Interior temperature Shows the interior temperature Heat sink temperature Shows the heat sink temperature Power consumption Power consumption only the most recent alarm history stored 3 26 Category 3 4 Programming Mode Details o 9 m S d o z c e Z O E im x r z N Output status FWD Rotating forward REV Rotating reverse EXT Inverter applies DC voltage to the motor INT
222. ncel Figure 3 4 Switching main monitor item display sample 3 3 Running Mode 3 3 2 Remote and Local modes The inverter is available in either remote or local mode In remote mode which applies to normal operation the inverter is driven under the control of the data setting stored in the inverter In local mode which applies to maintenance operation it is separated from the control system and is driven manually under the control by the keypad Holding down the amp 2 key on the keypad for 2 seconds or more toggles between remote and local modes Additionally local mode is not kept after turning power on again In other words the inverter starts up as remote mode always Ti The current mode can be checked by the status icons The REH is displayed in remote p IAE mode and the is displayed in local mode Switching from remote to local mode automatically inherits the reference speed pre ramp used in remote mode If the motor is running at the time of the switching from remote to local the run command will be automatically kept ON If however there is a discrepancy between the settings used in remote mode and ones made on the keypad e g switching from the reverse rotation in remote mode to the forward rotation only in local mode the inverter automatically stops o 9 m S d o z c ui E E x r z N 3 3 3 Setting up reference speed pre ramp In local mode you can set up the desired reference spe
223. nction codes F01 L54 for analog speed commands analog torque bias respectively Offset gain and filter time constant can be specified for individual terminals by function codes C31 to C33 C36 to C38 and C41 to C43 Note If these terminals have been set up by function codes to have the same data the specified values will be added up Command Assignment to FWD E01 to E08 Command Assignment to X1 to X8 Command Assignment to REV E01 to E08 Command Assignment to X1 to X8 Function codes E98 and E99 specify functions to assign to terminals FWD and REV For details refer to the descriptions of function codes E01 to E08 Command Assignment to X1 to X8 2 72 2 3 Overview of Function Code 2 3 3 C codes Control functions C01 Battery Operation Limit level C02 Battery Operation Limit time C01 and C02 specify the limitation level and detection time in battery operation The limitation method is depending on the control mode Data setting range C01 0 to 100 The meaning of 100 is 10kW 999 no operation Data setting range C02 0 0 to 30 0 s c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 B Input power limitation When the input power has exceeded the level specified CO1 and the input power continues longer than the period specified by C02 Limit time the inverter stops automatically and ZPL comes ON It turns OFF when FWD or REV command turns OFF Input power A C01
224. nd cooling fan has expired This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan If this signal comes ON use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not For details refer to the FRENIC Lift LM2 Instruction Manual INR SIA7 1894 E Section 6 3 E Inverter output on RUN2 Function code data 35 This output signal comes ON when the inverter turns ON its main circuit output gate It also comes ON when the motor is being tuned Bl Current detected and Current detected 2 D and D2 Function code data 37 and 38 The ZD or 1D2 signal comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by E34 or E37 Current Detection Level for the time longer than the one specified by E35 Current Detection Time provided that 37 or 38 is assigned to any general purpose input terminal respectively The minimum ON duration is 100 ms It goes OFF when the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level For details refer to the descriptions of function codes E34 E35 and E37 2 60 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Encoder rotating in forward direction FRUN Function code data 52 Encoder rotating in reverse direction RRUN Function code data 53 This output signals come ON by encoder s rotation direction and speed regardless of running status of
225. ne Stop bit 1 y18 No response error OFF 0 No detection detection time A A A A A y19 Response latency time y20 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol 1 SX protocol FRENIC Loader protocol 2 Reserved for particular manufacturers 5 DCP3 2 15 Code y21 y24 y25 y26 y27 y28 y29 y30 y31 y32 y33 y34 y35 y36 y37 y41 y95 y97 y99 CAN Communication Node ID Baud rate User defined I O parameter 1 User defined I O parameter 2 User defined l O parameter 3 User defined 1 O parameter 4 User defined I O parameter 6 User defined 1 O parameter 7 User defined 1 O parameter 8 User defined I O parameter 5 Operation Communications error processing Communication time out detection timer Operation selection in abort status Compatibility selection Setting method of speed command by communication Data clear processing for communications error Communication data storage selection Loader Link Function Change Data Data setting range Increment Unit when lt copying running 0 Y 3 1 Y 10 kbps 20 kbps 50 kbps 125 kbps 250 kbps 500 kbps 800 kbps 1 Mbps 00004 to FFFFH 0 Disable 1 Enable CiA 402 This function code is valid in case of y36 4 or 5 0 Set the motor immediately in coast to stop mode and trip with Ert After the time specified by y35 coast to a stop and trip with
226. ng Not required Digital output E 2001 to 3999 Analog input 1 Analog input 2 Value 1 Value 2 Analog digital output O 4001 to 6999 Analog input 1 Digital input 2 Value 1 Value 2 Analog output o Step 2 U06 U07 U08 U09 U10 S0002 z Step 3 U11 U12 U13 U14 U15 S0003 9 Step 4 U16 U17 U18 U19 U20 SO004 m Step 5 U2 U22 U23 U24 U25 S0005 v Step 6 U26 U27 U28 U29 U30 S0006 Step 7 U3 U32 U33 U34 U35 S0007 Step 8 U36 U37 U38 U39 U40 S0008 Step 9 U4 U42 U43 U44 U45 S0009 Step 10 U46 U47 U48 U49 U50 S0010 Step 11 U5 U52 U53 U54 U55 S0011 Step 12 U56 U57 U58 U59 U60 S0012 Step 13 U6 U62 U63 U64 U65 S0013 U U S0014 Note Output is not a function code It indicates the output signal symbol Step 15 to 200 Specify a step number in U190 and set the block selection input 1 input 2 function 1 function 2 in U191 to U195 respectively Block Function 1 Function 2 selection S0015 S0016 Step 199 S0199 Step 200 S0200 2 107 Input digital Block function code setting E Block selection U01 etc Digital Any of the following items can be selected as a logic function block with general purpose timer The data can be logically inverted by adding 1000 Logic function block No function assigned Description Output 1s always OFF 15 Through output General purpose timer
227. nged from factory default value S Spd 1450r nin S Spd 1450r nin PROD DEA PRG gt 2 gt 1 Rated speed 04Base speed 3450 00 r min ERated voltage 30 00 6000 00 Acc dec time1 Def 1450 00r nin Acc dec time2 Store 1450 00r nin ETorque boost GO Operat Mode SStoring Er Hid Gi9 0p Adjust gata value by using Inverter memorizes changed Inverter shows function code K QNI Q keys data and moves next screen selection screen with pointing automatically next function code by cursor Then press key to store data into memory Figure 3 8 Screen transition example for setting function code B Double key operation Some important function codes for example H03 Initialization require double key operation to prevent misoperation In order to change their data press 693 key and J key to increase or 63 key and V key to decrease B Changing function code data while running Data for some function codes can be changed when the inverter is running others cannot Furthermore for some function codes changing the data will cause those values to be reflected immediately without storing in inverter operation for other function codes they will not be reflected QJ For details on function codes refer to the 2 2 Function Code Table in Chapter 2 3 13 3 4 3 2 Checking function code data Data Check Function codes and function code data can be checked at the same time Also function codes that have been changed fro
228. nt Detection 2 Level 2 Function code E34 E35 and E37 specify current detection level and timer c es Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Data setting range E34 and E37 Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter rated current in units of amperes 0 00 disable Data setting range E35 0 01 to 600 00 s E34 E35 are set for over torque current detection Ot when L98 bit 0 is set to 1 LL For details refer to the description of function codes L98 bit 0 E Current detection Setting any of E20 to E24 and E27 data to 37 or 38 assigns the output signal Current detected 1 ID or Current detected 2 ZD2 to the general purpose programmable input terminals respectively The ZD or ID2 comes ON when the output current of the inverter has exceeded the level specified by E34 for ID or by E37 for ID2 and the output current continues longer than the period specified by E35 Current detection time It turns OFF when the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level Minimum width of the output signal 100 ms EE ATRE AT N Level E34 E37 E AES Si Sealab cn Leite Moe dL a 0 2 unen Level x 90 detection time E35 Output current 0 ID ID2 O oN RRD Detection Level The detection level of the recommended running direction at battery operation is set Data setting range 0 to 100 operation level E Judgment of recommended running direction When inverter is controll
229. nt of torque bias 5 155 b Reference torque decreasing The operation of reference torque decreasing is the following 1 RTDEC is changed from OFF to ON within three seconds after the to start operation Or when the operation is started RTDEC is already ON 2 When RTDEC is changed from ON to OFF When all the above mentioned are satisfied the inverter decreases the reference torque to initial torque bias The time until the decrease is completed is L56 In the absolute value if the reference torque when RTDEC is turned OFF A1 is not decreased Drive continuance alarm 4LM2 is output and the inverter stops with Er6 When RTDEC is changed from ON to OFF while the inverter is stopping the inverter trips with Er6 Nee Stop speed 0 0 9 Time gt Time Reference torque L56 oo VENCER ALM2 ALM Normal operation B Initial torque bias Reference torque B Initial torque bias doesn t decrease wo rc Tr 5 ae ENEENCNENEEEENM am Abnormal operation 2 172 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Short floor operation using S curve Bit 3 The operation mode of short floor operation can be selected by this function Even if Mode 2 is selected when it doesn t meet the requirement of Mode 2 it operates by Mode 1 z deyo Description of Mode 2 When the deceleration instruction to the creep velocity enters while accele
230. ntage to the rated torque Data setting range 1000 0 to 1000 0 96 LL Refer to the description of function code L54 for details L62 Torque Bias Digital 1 L54 Torque Bias Mode L63 Torque Bias Digital 2 L54 Torque Bias Mode L64 Torque Bias Digital 3 L54 Torque Bias Mode L62 to L64 specify digital torque bias amounts with the forward rotation direction torque as a positive value Data setting range 200 to 200 96 LL Refer to the description of function code L54 for details 2 156 2 3 Overview of Function Code L65 Unbalanced Load Compensation Operation L66 Activation timer L67 Holding time L68 ASR P constant L69 ASR I constant L73 APR P constant L74 APR D constant L75 Filter Time Constant for Detected Speed L76 ACR P constant L65 specifies whether to enable or disable the unbalanced load compensation Data for L65 Function Disable the unbalanced load compensation Enable the unbalanced load compensation Unbalanced load compensation This compensation function estimates an unbalanced load and calculates the required torque bias amount inside the inverter Setting 67 to any general purpose programmable input terminal by function codes E01 to E08 E98 and E99 assigns the UNBL command With the UNBL being assigned entering a UNBL command following a run command starts estimating an unbalanced load If no UNBL is assigned entering a run command start
231. ode data to factory defaults H03 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults It is suited for vector control for asynchronous motors E Initialize function code data except communication function codes H03 11 The function codes other than the communication function codes y codes are initialized Communication can be continued after initialization E Initialize customizable logic U U1 code data H03 12 Initializes the customizable logic U U1 code data Any other function code data are not initialized 2 85 E System specific initialization H03 2 3 Initializes data of the specified function codes to the values required for the system as listed below Data of function code shown as or not listed below will be initialized to the factory defaults Initialized to Target function code H03 2 H03 3 Rated Speed 60 00 r min Base Speed 60 00 r min DC Braking Starting Speed 6 00 r min DC Braking Braking Level 50 96 DC Braking Braking Time 1 00 s Starting Speed 15 00 r min Stop Speed 0 20 r min 6 00 r min Control Mode 1 Speed Arrival FAR Hysteresis 0 60 r min Speed Detection FDT Detection level 60 00 r min Speed Detection FDT Hysteresis 0 60 r min Speed Detection 2 FDT2 Detection level 60 00 r min Battery Operation speed 2 00 r min Maintenance Speed 20 00 r min Creep Speed 3 00 r min High Speed 1 60 00 r min Jogging Operat
232. of the motor The following formula is used for the conversion 12 Motor speed r min x Frequency Hz No of poles Data setting range 2 to 100 poles Note Changing the P01 data requires modifying the data of some function codes For details refer to section 2 2 Motor Rated capacity P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor Enter the rated value shown on the nameplate of the motor Data setting range 0 01 to 55 00 KW Motor Rated current P03 specifies the rated current of the motor Enter the rated value shown on the nameplate of the motor Data setting range 0 00 to 500 0 A 2 81 c es Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Motor Auto tuning The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory Basically it is not necessary to perform tuning when a Fuji standard motor is used with a standard connection with the inverter P04 1 2 and 3 are only for asynchronous motors P04 4 can be used for both types of motors For synchronous motors the magnetic pole position offset tuning L03 should be applied Auto tuning Action Motor parameters to be tuned Disable Tune the motor Tune R1 and X while Primary resistance R1 while it is stopped the motor is stopped Leakage reactance X Primary resistance Leakage reactance X Rated slip frequency Tune the motor while it is stopped current and rated slip while the moto
233. ogic Monitor Load Factor COM Debug 2 198 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING TP A1 LM2 This chapter describes how to operate FRENIC Lift LM2 using with optional multi function keypad TP A1 LM2 Contents 3 1 LCD monitor keys and LED indicators on the keypad sse 3 1 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes ener ennt nennen nene ne rnnt nnne nnne 3 5 3 3 Runnitig Mode Cordes editt e rete etas hue 3 6 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status essssesesseseereeeene ennemi nn enne 3 6 333 2 Remote and Local modes 1 ese teen ee Hetero he ete REED eek Po Ee dea ea ded eds 3 7 3 3 3 Setting up reference speed pre ramp ssssssssssssesseseeeeen ener nennen 3 7 3 3 4 Running stopping the motor eene enne nnne nennen enne nnn nnn enne nnne nes 3 8 3 4 Programming Mode ois oe e E e e qat ON e TR ERR ER no 3 9 34 1 Quick Setups eant ene etii tesi i S E e e DURER REG 3 11 921 27 STtarCUpus oom ete ode Ob iet ee p EE E TOE EE ENTO iode cant 3 11 94 3 Eunctioti Codes sedate EROR QT ET aad 3 13 3 4 4 Inverter Information INV InfO 5 eee bee ec ete Wee ee ode ety 3 19 3 4 5 Alarm Information Alarm Info esssesssssseseseeseeeeeeeeeenenerennenn enne enne nnne nennen nnne 3 26 3 4 6 User Configuration User Conflg ere ER RE Te SERT UR T REUS ERES THES 3 28 Sd TIOOIS 5c eC e coasts cats ceeds NE P oderit le EET ine eg eR a 3 29 3 5 Alarm Mode e ede
234. om the next run until the stop Note A Tip During load factor measurement the amp 9 key transitions into running mode The key moves to the measurement mode selection screen In this case load factor measurement will be continued 3 4 7 3 Communication Debug COM Debug PRG gt 6 gt 3 Communication specific function codes S M W W1 W2 W3 X Z can be monitored and set 3 29 o 9 m S d z c eui Z E M x r z N 3 5 Alarm Mode If an abnormal condition arises the protective function is invoked and issues an alarm then the inverter automatically enters Alarm mode At the same time an alarm code appears on the LCD monitor 3 5 4 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the 4 key to release the alarm and return to Running mode The alarm can be removed using the amp amp key only when the alarm code is displayed 3 5 2 Displaying the alarm history It is possible to display 4 alarm codes newest past 3 alarms in addition to the one currently displayed Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the A Q key while the current alarm code is displayed 3 5 3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm When the alarm code is displayed you may check various running status information output frequency and output current etc by pressing the key Further you can view various pieces of information on
235. on Displays alarm information Alarm history PRG gt 4 gt 1 Lists alarm history newest 3 previous Also this allows you to view the detail information on the running status at the time when alarm occurred 5 User Co nfigure Allows any settings to be made Allows function codes to be added to or deleted from i i gt 5 gt Quick setup selection PRG gt 5 gt 1 the Quick Setup 6 Tools Various functions 1 Customizable logic PRG gt 6 gt 1 Previews status of each step in customizable logic monitor All t of th tional status of th 2 Load Factor Measurement PRG gt 6 gt 2 nd pc Pc are dabo pM ME Rad maximum output current and average output current 3 Communication PRG gt 6 gt 3 Allows monitoring and setting of function codes for Debugginf communication S M W X Z and etc 3 10 3 4 Programming Mode 3 4 1 Quick Setup PRG 0 Menu number 0 Quick Setup shows only those function codes predetermined to have a high usage frequency Menu number 5 User Config can be used to add or delete function codes from the Quick Setup 3 4 2 Start up PRG gt 1 Menu number 1 Start up allows display of information needed on startup the language displayed on the LCD monitor and inverter operational status 3 4 2 1 Set Display Language Language PRG gt 1 gt 1 gt K Allows setting of the keypad display language 15 languages user customizable language
236. on is used to control motor phases short circuit device mini contactor or power relay This output function has to be wired to the coil of the motor phases short circuit device Short circuit contact has to be a normally closed contact In other words when inverter is not supplied motor phases has to be short circuited When SCC output function is in ON state voltage is applied to the short circuit contact colis and it opens For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L120 and L121 E Loadcell LV1 detection LC1 Function code data 127 This output function turns ON and is kept ON when after timer L144 is elapsed torque detected is below level set on L145 After RUN command is removed it turns automatically to OFF When torque detected is over level set on L145 and timer L144 is elapsed it will remain OFF For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L143 to L147 E Loadcell Full load detection LCF Function code data 128 This output function turns ON and is kept ON when after timer L144 is elapsed torque detected is over L146 level included and below L147 After RUN command is removed it turns automatically to OFF When torque detected is out of torque range specified by levels L146 and L147 and timer L144 is elapsed it will remain OFF For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L143 to L147 E Loadcell Overload detection LCO Function code data 129 This
237. op speed 2 40 2 3 Overview of Function Code ii When an analog speed command Not reversible is enabled F01 1 As soon as run command is ON soft start operation starts As soon as soft start operation is finished inverter will keep starting speed as long as reference speed is below starting speed When the reference speed pre ramp exceeds the starting speed the inverter immediately accelerates from the current speed up to the reference speed pre ramp Speed pee Reference Speed SS c es Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Starting Speed ree eere AC Analog speed command gt FWD SW52 2 Output Gate i meee S L85 H64 F24 H65 ote Inverter does not start acceleration to the reference speed pre ramp as long as the reference speed pre ramp does not exceed the stop speed iii When an analog speed command Reversible is enabled F01 2 During this operation soft start is disabled When the reference speed pre ramp exceeds the starting speed the inverter starts acceleration from starting speed to the reference speed pre ramp Speed P Reference Speed Analog speed command Starting speed F23 ON ON H Las H64 F24 Note Inverter does not start acceleration to the reference speed pre ramp as long as the reference speed pre ramp does not exceed the stop speed 2 41 Torque start mode Setting L52 data to 1 enables the to
238. or PMSM is selected F42 1s 1 and PG Hz is ON When this terminal is assigned Pulse encoder selection is selected according to PMSM and option L01 1 2 3 4 5 DC bus voltage Edc is higher than the under voltage level LL Refer to the explanation of PTD for details c es Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Operation sample Reference Speed i L85 Automatic L82 magnetic pole Normal operation position tuning The magnetic pole position tuning operates after operation command turning ON The magnetic pole position tuning doesn t operate from the next driving The validation test must be done for every type of motor to use with this function After that use this function with the setting that tuning result becomes always correct Please use BRKS so as not to open the mechanical brake during the automatic magnetic pole position tuning When you do not use BRKS make an interlock as not to open the mechanical brake when PTD is turning off When using battery operation keep the magnetic pole position value in power failure by supplying the control power from UPS and so on Because tuning is impossible in battery operation When this function is used the operation start timing is different between the first operation after turning on the power supply and second operation or later Understand this notice sufficiently and design the system as the elevator controller etc PPT terminal tuning operates in t
239. or down at a speed of 2 to 10 of the elevator rated speed Adjust L60 and L61 data in the forward and reverse direction respectively so that the monitored data comes to approximately 0 when the speed is stabilized Note For torque bias setting with current input the input current on terminal V2 Cl function should be within the range from 4 to 20 mA when the elevator is with no load to the maximum load 2 152 2 3 Overview of Function Code Digital torque bias L54 1 Setting L54 data to 1 enables torque bias setting with digital input When L54 1 setting 60 or 61 to any general purpose programmable input terminal by function codes E01 to E08 E98 and E99 assigns command TBI or TB2 respectively If neither TBI nor TB2 is assigned the torque bias is 0 The table below shows the relationship between the TBI TB2 command settings and the torque bias value If only either one of those commands is assigned the unassigned terminal is regarded as OFF L60 and L61 specify the gains at the driving and braking sides When the inverter is running a reference torque bias should be held at the host controller side Chattering of a reference torque bias during running will result in vibration If it is difficult to hold a reference torque bias at the host controller side use a torque bias hold command and startup timer described in the description of L55 Torque bias startup timer Torque bias value Specified b
240. or items specified with E48 LED Monitor Speed monitor item Define the speed monitoring format on the LED monitor as listed below E LED monitor Speed monitor item E48 Data for E48 Display format of the sub item Reference speed final Expressed in units selected by C21 Reference speed pre ramp Expressed in units selected by C21 Motor speed Expressed in r min Elevator speed Expressed in m min 2 70 Elevator speed mm s Expressed in mm s 2 3 Overview of Function Code LED Monitor Speed monitor item E43 LED Monitor Item selection E48 specifies speed mode to be displayed on the LED speed monitor when the speed monitor is selected by E43 For details refer to the description of function code E43 e Keypad Menu display mode E52 provides a choice of three menu display modes for the keypad TP E1U as listed below E52 data Menu display mode Menus to be displayed 4 Function code data editing mode Menus 0 1 and 7 Menus 2 and 7 Menus 0 through 7 Function code data check mode Full menu mode E52 specifies the menus to be displayed on the standard keypad There are eight menus as shown in the table below LED monitor Function Display content Quick setup Quick setup function code Data setting F to o F to K group function code Data check Modified function code Operation monitor Operation status indication I O check DIO AIO statu
241. orking properly Even real brake status is opened it shows for a certain periode that brake is not opened contact chattering After timer L84 is elapsed inverter generates internally an alarm that is shown at the end of the travel 2 97 Speed High speed Creep speed Stop speed F25 BRKE EHEESUENN BRKE2 i Brake1 o i Brake2 Release Release i IU ho as ALM j AN MN pi que i 1 M 1 D 3T L82 L84 Leal iL83 L84 R Inverter doesn t trip bbE Inverter doesn t Generate bbE because L84 timer is not expired Figure 4 Inverter doesn t trip bbE alarm even BRKE2 signal is OFF during travel On the other hand figure 4 shows that brake 2 is not working properly for a while as well even so as brake recovers before L84 timer elapses no alarm is generated d Brake feedback is abnormal when motor is stopped In this case there are two possibilities with and without RBRK function active Rescue operation by external brake control active Speed 0 EN ENT EN2 FWD SS Inverter doesn t trip bbE because L84 timer is not expired Figure 5 bbE alarm while motor is stopped and RBRK function is not used 2 98 2 3 Overview of Function Code As it can be observed in figure 5 somebody or something is opening the brake even inverter is not asking to do so In other words brake is manipulated even it should be c
242. ote that you set the time length required to decrease the motor rating torque from 100 to 0 to the reference torque end timer Creep speed Stop speed duration 0 Time Creep speed Zero speed Inverter output command command shut down Inverter output SS2 am SS4 Torque bias i XT RES Oe RARI VEECEL EST D L56 slope to decelerate Reference torque of inverter inside Reference Torque End Sequence in Speed Control 2 155 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Torque Bias Limiter L57 specifies the absolute value of a torque bias amount to be used after the driving or braking gain is applied as a percentage to the rated torque It limits a torque bias amount for protection against a load sensor defective and others Data setting range 0 to 200 Torque Bias P constant L54 Torque Bias Mode L58 specifies the P constant to use in PI torque bias Data setting range 0 01 to 10 00 LL Refer to the description of function code L54 for details Torque Bias I constant L54 Torque Bias Mode L59 specifies the I constant to use in PI torque bias Data setting range 0 00 to 1 00 s LL Refer to the description of function code L54 for details Torque Bias Driving gain L54 Torque Bias Mode Torque Bias Braking gain L54 Torque Bias Mode L60 and L61 specify the gains of torque biases at the driving and braking sides respectively as a perce
243. oughly proportional to the output current of the motor But in case of vector control with PG for asynchronous motor it is not proportional to the output current of the motor E Drive continuance alarm Bit 1 If the function is enabled when the following alarms happen the inverter keeps driving the motor for ten seconds It is possibe that the driving elevator can be stop safely when alarm happens OH2 External alarm input 2 THR2 OH4 Motor protection PTC thermistor OL1 Motor protection Electronic thermal OLU inverter unit Overload Er6 Reference torque decreasing command error 2 169 When special alarm happens the inverter keeps driving the motor for ten seconds by drive continuance alarm After 10 seconds if the output is shut down drive continuance alarm will happen and inverter will be stop Drive continuance alarm will be kept until inverter reset Drive continuance object alarm occur Object alarm Alarm occur Alarm output ALM i l ON Drive ti f continuance ON alarm ALM2 Driving signal Drivi j RUN riving A 10s i Dri i Inverter driving Drive rive continuance stop Excluding drive continuance alarm Excluding alarm Alarm occur Alarm output ALM SUM e Drive continuance ON alarm output ALM2 Drinving signal Drivi RUN riving Inverter Driving Stop operation Both alarms Object alarm Alarm occur Excluding alarm Alarm occur Alarm output ALM
244. output function turns ON and is kept ON when after timer L144 is elapsed torque detected is above level set on L147 After RUN command is removed it turns automatically to OFF When torque detected is below level set on L147 and timer L144 is elapsed it will remain OFF For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L143 to L147 2 65 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA Bl Customizable logic output signal 1 to 10 CLO1 to CLO10 Function code data 2141 to 150 Outputs the result of customizable logic operation For details refer to the descriptions of function codes U codes Note above No 1000 are logical inversion signals active OFF 2 66 2 3 Overview of Function Code E30 Speed Arrival Hysteresis H75 Speed Agreement Delay time E30 specifies the detection range of the speed arrival signal Data setting range 0 00 to 6000 r min z deyo LL Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 E Output signals Speed arrival FAR Speed arrival 3 FAR3 During acceleration DACC and During deceleration DDEC The output signal FAR can be assigned to a general purpose programmable output terminal by setting 1 E20 to E24 and E27 The FAR comes ON when the detected speed against the reference speed pre ramp is within the specified range However if the run command is OFF or the reference speed pre ramp is less than 0 00 r min
245. p Input 1T o Mack m soo 44 9 1 C103 Input 2 Oo S0200 a 1 0200 20 o i o Digital input Digital output X terminal Y terminal x1 SS1 RUN x2 SS2 FAR x3 SS4 FDT Y3A C x4 ey TRY YAAIC x5 BX Inverter 5SWs 2 Y5A C X6 eph Sequence leswm a 30A BIC processor X7 TB1 5 4 BRKS TB2 x8 L o1ID WD UNBL FRUN REV FWD O Internal input signal Internal output signal Note Mode selection function codes for enabling customizable logic can be modified during operation but the customizable logic output may become temporarily unstable due to the setting modification Therefore since unexpected operation can be performed change the settings if possible when the inverter is stopped A physical injury may result A damage may result 2 105 U00 Customizable logic Mode selection U01 to U70 Customizable logic Step 1 to 14 Mode setting U71 to U80 Customizable logic Output signal 1 to 10 Output selection U81 to U90 Customizable logic Output signal 1 to 10 Function selection U91 Customizable logic Timer monitor Step selection U92 to U97 Customizable logic The coefficients of the approximate formula U100 Customizable logic Task process cycle setting U101 to U106 Customizable logic Operating point 1 to 3 U107 Customizable logic Auto calculation of the coefficients of the approximate formula U121 to U140 Customizable logic User parameter 1 to 20 U171 to
246. p by Ert alarm 1 Set the motor in coast to stop mode and trip by Ert alarm when the time set by y35 Timer has expired Ignore the alarm condition if the communications 2 link 1s restored within the timer value specified by y35 If the timer value is exceeded then set the motor in coast to stop mode and trip by Ert alarm 3 to 15 Same as y34 0 E Communication time out detection timer y35 Timer on CANopen communication error Data setting range 0 0 to 60 0 s Bl Operation selection in abort status y36 Selectthe operation at the time of communication abort occurs y36 data Function Error with NMT state check Error without NMT state check No error with NMT state check No error with NMT state check Immediate error with NMT state check No error Immediate error without NMT state check No error without NMT state check No error without NMT state check The cause of disconnection referred to below 1 Bus off Error passive is not included 2 Guarding timeout detection 3 Heartbeat timeout detection 4 If the NMT state has changed from Operational y36 factor 4 factor 4 without NMT with NMT y34 y35 Operation overview state check state check Disable Voltage command receiving operation 2 2 don t care No error Quick stop command receive operation 3 3 don t care No error y35 seconds after error The recovery wi
247. peration are detailed in the description of the function code having the lowest identifying number Those related function codes are indicated in the right end of the title bar as shown below c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 2 23 2 3 1 F codes Fundamental functions Data Protection H99 Password Protection E Data protection F00 F00 specifies whether to protect function code data from getting changed accidentally When the multi function keypad is connected simultaneous keying of Eo CS or 6o Q switches the data protection from disable to enable or vice versa respectively YS Data setting range 0000H Disable data protection 0001H Enable data protection E Password protection H99 H99 specifies a password which enables the password protection To change password protected function code data enter the specified password to FOO to disable the password protection temporarily With that state setting H99 to 0000 permanently disables the password protection When the multi function keypad is connected simultaneous keying of 69 j or 69 Q switches the password protection from disable to enable or vice versa respectively Data setting range 0000n Disable password protection 00014 to FFFFH Enable password protection Function code data Specified state Changing function code data Checking function code data Initialization ofl function code data H03 F00 0000 Da
248. previous values of input signals Increment counter with reset input By the rising edge of the input signal the logic function block increments the counter value by one When the counter value reaches the target one the output signal turns ON Turning the reset signal ON resets the counter to zero Decrement counter with reset input By the rising edge of the input signal the logic function block decrements the counter value by one When the counter value reaches zero the output signal turns ON Turning the reset signal ON resets the counter to the initial value Timer output with reset Input If the input signal turns ON the output signal turns ON i gt and the timer starts When the period specified by the Timer with reset input timer has elapsed the output signal turns OFF regardless of the input signal state Turning the reset signal ON resets the current timer value to zero and turns the output OFF Hold General purpose 100 to 105 timer z deyo Increment counter 3002 NOILONNA Decrement counter The data can be logically inverted by adding 1000 The block diagrams for individual functions are given below Data 1L1 Through out
249. ption C port Shows the option B port ROM version as four digits OpC ROM version Option A port Type OpA Shows the option A port name of type Option B port Type OpB Not supported Option C port Type OpC Shows the option C port name of type 3 24 3 4 4 4 sev S Spd 1450r min PRG 3 3 1 9 v Operation Time 36 hours Edc 550v Imax 12 304 Wh 7 3 kWh S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 3 gt 3 4 9 E Motor EneT 1 hours EneN 455 S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 3 gt 3 7 9 e CAN SD Er RD Er REV S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 3 gt 3 2 9 S Operation G On 0 00 x10000 P On 0 00 x10000 Cooling Fan EneT 1 hours Life 8700 hours e Maintenace e S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 3 gt 3 5 9 S Temperature Int 47 C Max 52 C Fin 55 C Max 64 C Zi iMaintenace IZA S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 3 gt 3 8 9 e ROM Version Main 0300 KP 8000 OpA 0000 OpB OpC 0100 i lA CY 3 4 Programming Mode sev S Spd 1450r min PRG 3 3 3 9 S Main Capacitor Cap 99 3 PCB Capacitor EneT 3 hours Life 8700 hours S Spd_ 1450r min _ PRG gt 3 gt 3 6 9 COM Error Chi Ch2 OpA OpB OpC S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 3 gt 3 9 9 A Option Type OpA None OpB None OpC OPC PR Figure 3 16 Screen transition for Maintenance display sample PRG 3 4 View Unit Information Unit Info Shows inverter type serial number and ROM version S Spd 1450r nmin PRG gt
250. put Data 2L1 Logical AND Data 3L1 Logical OR General purpose timer Input 1 E Output Input 1 Input 1 MES General purpose timer General purpose timer E E Output 5 IE Output Input 2 Input 2 Input 2 Data 4L1 Logical XOR Data 5L1 Set priority flip flop General purpose timer Input 1 Input 2 jue Input 1 Input 1 la RS NN Output P General purpose timer S Ez n Output R Input 2 Input 2 Set priority Data 6L 1 Reset priority flip flop G l purpose timer i Lune eneral purp Input 1 Input 2 iria Remarks Input 1 M Output outpu T 9 Hold R previous OFF value Input 2 Reset priority 2 109 Data 7 Rising edge detector Data 8 Falling edge detector Data 9 1 Rising amp falling edges detector Rising edge detector General purpose timer Falling edge detector Genera purpose timer Rising amp falling edges detector General purpose timer Input 1 LE Output Input 1 4 LE Output Input 1 ky n Output Input 2 Input 2 Input 2 Data 10L1 Hold Data 110 Increment counter Data 120 Decrement counter
251. quency is specified the temperature of the inverter may rise due to an ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load If it happens the inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter overheat alarm OH3 or inverter overload alarm OLU In order to keep low acustic noise level on the motor this function can be disabled see function code H98 F30 to F31 Analog Output FMA Output gain Function selection These function codes allow terminal FMA to output monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current in an analog DC voltage or current The magnitude of such analog voltage or current is adjustable B Output gain F30 F30 allows you to adjust the output voltage within the range of 0 to 300 co D S 5 gt wm amp F30 30096 F30 200 F30 100 8 10V pe T t sy F30 50 m BLAU e et a LUE E E 2 OV i i 096 33 50 100 Meter scale 2 45 E Function selection F31 F31 specify which data is monitored at the output terminals FMA FMA output Reference speed Final Output frequency of the inverter Equivalent to the motor rated speed Definition of monitor amount 100 Rated Speed F03 Primary frequency Output frequency of the inverter Rated Speed F03 Output current Output current RMS of the inverter Twice the inverter rated current Output voltage Output voltage RMS of the inverter 200 V class 250 V 4
252. r is stopped Tune R1 X no load No load current 4 R1 No load current No load current is A a Tune the motor calculated Otterseate Primary resistance JoR1 while it is stopped x Leakage reactance X same as the P04 2 Rated slip frequency Reserved zu Note In any of the following cases perform auto tuning This is because you may not obtain the best performance under the PG vector control since the motor parameters are different from that of Fuji standard motors The motor to be driven is a non Fuji motor or a non standard motor Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long Generally 20 m 66 ft or longer Areactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter Other applicable cases 2 82 2 3 Overview of Function Code Motor No load current P07 Motor R1 P08 Motor X These function codes specify no load current R1 and X Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor If you perform auto tuning these parameters are automatically set as well E No load current P06 Enter the value obtained from the motor manufacturer Data setting range 0 00 to 500 0 A B R1 P07 Enter the value calculated by the following formula RI Cable RI gg ee vae S 2100 0 V 3x1 09 where R1 Primary resistance of the motor Q Cable R1 Resistance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V
253. r rotating in forward direction 1053 Encoder rotating in reverse direction 1055 Run command activated 1056 Motor overheat detected PTC 1057 Brake control 1070 Speed existence 1071 Speed agreement 1072 Speed arrival 3 1073 During acceleration 1074 During deceleration 1075 During zero speed 1076 PG abnormal 1078 Door control 1099 Alarm output for any alarm 1101 EN detection circuit fault 1102 EN terminal off 1104 Low voltage detected 1105 Electric angle cycle 1107 Magnetic pole position offset tuning Recommended running direction in battery 1109 4 operation 1110 Drive continuance alarm 1111 Shutdown confirmation 1112 Input power limitation 1114 MC control 2 1115 Pole tuning done 2 57 Function code data Active ON Active OFF Functions assigned 116 1116 Detected speed direction 121 1121 Travel Direction Changes lifetime early warning 122 1122 Travel Direction Changes pulse 123 1123 Short circuit control 126 1126 Pole tuning done with reference to Z signal 127 1127 Loadcell LV1 detection 128 1128 Loadcell Full load detection 129 1129 Loadcell Overload detection 141 1141 Customizable logic output signal 1 142 1142 Customizable logic output signal 2 143 1143 Customizable logic output si
254. ram at stop Timing diagram at start Reference speed F23 Reference speed F20 DC Brake OFF ON OFF Output voltage Output voltage Motor speed Motor speed Note DC braking operates at the stop speed when the stop speed F25 is bigger than DCB starting speed F20 2 38 2 3 Overview of Function Code Starting Speed H65 Starting Speed Soft start time L52 Start Control Mode Starting Speed Holding time F23 F24 H65 and L52 specify the starting speed its holding time soft start time and start control mode respectively to reduce an impact to the load at the start of running B Starting speed F23 F23 specifies the starting speed for the inverter Data setting range 0 00 to 150 0 r min LL Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 E Holding time F24 F24 specifies the holding time of running at the starting speed Accelerating after running at the starting speed for that duration can reduce an impact to the load at the start of running Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s E Zero speed control time H64 In case of Vector control with PG As soon as IGBT gates are ON Zero speed control time starts to count During this time motor is controlled at zero speed Brake will open as well BRKS to ON When this time is elapsed motor accelerates to starting speed according to so
255. rating it operates S curve setting is automatically adjusted and decelerates The operation condition of Mode 2 is as follows When it is not possible to satisfy it it operates by Mode 1 The deceleration instruction to the creep speed C07 is put while accelerating to Low speed C09 Middle speed C10 or High speed C11 from Zero speed C04 S curve used is 10 or more Figure to The range of acceleration time and deceleration time used is 1 to 10 seconds Figure 3002 NOILONNA The difference at a set speed of the attainment speed C09 to C11 and the creep C07 velocity is rated speed F03 1096 or more 200Hz or less in frequency conversion rated speed F03 LL Refer to function code L29 for details of Mode 1 Note Change speed or neither Addition and subtraction velocity time or S curve when you drive with Mode 2 The accuracy of the generated speed pattern is not guaranteed Operate it as you can absorb the error margin by the creep driving 2 173 When you give the instruction in the creep velocity after acceleration to the high speed ends Speed L24 S curve L25 S curve setting 6 setting 7 E13 Acceleration bite Bal el ae VE e deceleration time 6 E12 Acceleration deceleration time 5 High speed L26 S curve setting 8 i vo L28 S curve Creep speed gt gt gt AP EO ee aN Ree RT TEM e Ne setting 10 Zero speed A i P 7 T19 S curve L dunt xe
256. ration 0 00 to 99 9 Variable F10 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor Select motor characteristics 1 For general purpose motors with built in self cooling fan 2 For inverter driven motors or high speed motors with forced ventilation fan F11 Overload detection level OFF 0 00 Disable Variable 1 to 200 of the rated current allowable continuous drive current of the inverter F20 F22 Braking Time OFF 0 00 Disable 0 01 0 01 to 30 00 F25 0 00 to 150 0 Equivalent with 0 00 to 5 00 Hz Variable F26 Motor Sound M omamme 000000000000 3 F30 FMA Terminal 0 Reference speed Final 1 Primary frequency 2 Output current 3 Output voltage 4 Output torque 8 Actual speed 9 DC link bus voltage 10 Universal AO 14 Calibration 18 Inverter heat sink temperature 19 Inverter intemal temperature 111 Customizable logic output signal 1 120 Customizable logic output signal 10 F42 Control Mode 0 Vector control with PG for asynchronous motor 1 Vector control with PG for synchronous motor 2 Torque vector control F44 Current Limiter Auto 32767 Maximum current of each inverter automatically 1 applies 100 to 230 Percentage to the rated current of the inverter F50 Electronic thermal overload protection for braking resistor Discharging capacity OFF 32767 Disable 1 kWs 1 to 9000 F52 Resistance None 0 00 Not applicable Ohm 0 01 to 999 1 The data setting range is variable Refer to Section 2 2
257. ration Time Jogging H54 and H55 specify the acceleration and deceleration times for jogging operation respectively The acceleration time is the one required for accelerating from 0 00 to the maximum speed r min and the deceleration time for decelerating from the maximum speed to 0 00 r min Data setting range 0 00 to 99 9 s L For details refer to function code C20 Deceleration Time for Forced to Decelerate H56 specifies the deceleration time for forced deceleration The deceleration time is the one required for decelerating from the maximum speed to 0 00 r min Data setting range 0 00 to 99 9 s E Forced to decelerate The DRS command can be assigned to a general purpose programmable input terminal by setting 66 The DRS should be ON when the inverter is running Turning the DRS OFF decelerates the speed during the time specified by H56 and then shuts down the inverter output upon detection of a stop speed Once the DRS goes OFF the inverter no longer runs that is the forced to decelerate mode will no longer be canceled until the run command goes OFF and the inverter output is shut down The operation scheme is shown below Speed High speed Slope to decelerate by H56 Stop speed Zero speed Zero speed High speed Forced to Output High speed Time command command decelerate shut down command FWD OFF St Forced to decelerate mode DRS OFF 2 92 2 3 Overview of Function Code H57 to H60 S
258. ration by brake control gravity movement independently of the inverter in other words without looking the inverter due to bbE alarm 2 95 c c Z O a O z Q O i m 02 E Brakes monitor according to UCM Check brake control select H96 This function code selects mode operation Enabled disabled for Brakes monitor according to UCM as shown below Data for H96 Action 0 Disable factory default Even BRKEI and BRKE2 functions are correctly programmed and wired monitoring function for UCM is not active BRKE function is enabled Enable Brakes monitor operation is performed by BRKEI and BRKE2 according to UCM When status of BRKEI and BRKE2 doesn t match with BRKS brake check timer L84 starts bbE alarm 1s generated when BRKEI or BRKE2 doesn t match with BRKS more than time specified in L84 When lift is traveling alarm is not issued alarm is generated as soon as BRKS function is OFF and L84 timer is elapsed On the following figures each possible scenario using BRKEJ and BRKE2 functions are explained a Brake feedback not matching with brake control signal at the second travel start Travel with abnormal brake Standard travel Operation at starting High speed 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 Creep speed 4 i Stop speed F25 Leo 7 ee ee ee 1 i Z ro speed High speed command C
259. rced to Decelerate E Start unbalance load compensation UNBL Function code data 67 Turning this terminal command ON starts unbalance load compensation Synchronize brake control signal from the user controller When this terminal command is OFF unbalance load compensation will be started after run command is ON For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L65 to L76 Unbalanced Load Compensation E Magnetic pole position offset tuning command PPT Function code data 69 PPT is a function for the ABZ encoder The ABZ encoder doesn t have angle information The motor cannot be driven because there is no means to know the magnetic pole position at this time In case of L99 biti 0 When magnetic pole position offset tuning is done magnetic pole position offset value L04 is not changed In case of L99 bit1 1 When magnetic pole position offset tuning is done magnetic pole position offset value L04 is changed At this time it is necessary to rotate the motor more than one rotation You should carry out the tuning with L99 bit 1 when you begin to use the motor or change the encoder After the trial run ends the setting of L99 bit 0 is recommended For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L07 and L99 E Cancel customizable logic CLC Function code data 80 Clear all customizable logic timers CLTC Function code data 81 Terminal command CLC stops the operation
260. reep speed Zerbspeed command command command PRS eke E L82 L84 183i L84 Figure 1 bbE alarm at starting of second travel On figure 1 two travels are shown On the first travel as brake status is matching with brake control signal all the travel inverter is not tripping On the other hand when second travel starts as brake 2 doesn t open inverter trips bbE after L84 timer is elapsed 2 96 2 3 Overview of Function Code b Brake feedback not matching with brake control signal at stop Speed High speed Creep speed Stop speed F25 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 BRKS m BFKET C IEEE MR BRKEZ NEUEN a Brakel Brake2 Release bg mE yon AM d MEE NENEEEEENENENN RI is Pe z L82 L84 L83 L8 Inverter trips bbE Figure 2 bbE alarm at stop As it can be observed in figure 2 because brake 2 remains open even signal BRKS is OFF inverter is tripping bbE alarm at stop c Brake feedback not matching with brake control signal during travel Speed High speed Creep speed Stop speed F25 le sl bs SF L82 L84 i L84 iL83 L84 1 4 5d RUE 1 Inverter trips bbE 1 Alarm is internally generated Figure 3 bbE alarm at stop due to brake monitoring problem during travel As it can be observed in figure 3 brake 1 feedback contact is not w
261. rence torque 3 20 S Spd 1450r nin PRG gt 3 gt 1 1 8 v Fref 48 33uz Fouti 0 00 uz Fout2 0 00 uz SyncSp 0 00 r min LiftSp 0 00 mm s S Spd 1450r nin PRG 3 1 4 8 Status2 L FAR FDT a RDY S Spd 1450r min PRG gt 3 gt 1 7 8 SpInit 0 00 mm s SpTrgt 0 00 mm s Dist Omm Acc 0 mm s Jerk1 0 mm s Jerk2 O mm s PRG gt 3 gt 1 2 8 e Iout 0 004 Vout 0 0v Torque 0 Power 0 03 kw LiftSp 0 00 mm s S Spd 1450r nin PRG 3 1 5 8 TRQC 0 TRQI 0 TRQB 0 0 30 C S Spd 1450r nin PRG gt 3 gt 1 8 8 ai SpInit 0 00 mm s SpTrgt 0 00 mm s Dist O mm Acc 0 mn s Jerk1 0 mm s Jerk2 0 mm s 3 4 Programming Mode PRG gt 3 gt 1 3 8 e Status INT IM PG IM LITratimit a PG Hz LlLowvolt PRG gt 3 gt 1 6 8 CAN Sta0 CAN Bus 0 Normal CAN STMO Figure 3 14 Screen transition for Op Monitor display sample 3 21 o U m S d o z c ui O E E x r z N 3 4 4 2 Check Status of Input Output Signal Status I O Check This allows confirmation of the inverter s digital input output signal and analog input output signal This can be used when confirming operational status during maintenance or on test runs Category Table 3 12 Display items in I O Check Category Details Control circuit terminal input signal terminal input FWD REV XI X8 ENI EN2 Details ON OFF information on control circuit s termin
262. riable Refer to Section 2 2 2 The factory default setting varies depending on the shipping destination 3 The unit changes depending on the setting of C21 4 Reserved for particular manufacturers Do not access this function code 2 The factory default setting varies depending on the shipping destination 5 Itis indicated depending on reference speed final 2 7 E C codes Control Functions Code C01 C02 C03 C04 C05 C06 C07 C08 cog C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18 C19 C20 C21 C22 C31 C32 C33 C36 C37 C38 C41 C42 C43 C89 C90 Data setting range Battery Operation Input power limit level O to 100 OFF 32767 Torque limit level is F44 Limit time Battery Operation Speed Multistep Speed Zero Speed Manual Speed Middle Maintenance Speed Creep Speed Manual Speed Low Low Speed Middle Speed High Speed High Speed 2 High Speed 3 High Speed 4 High Speed 5 High Speed 6 High Speed 7 High Speed 8 High Speed 9 Speed Command Unit 0 r min 1 m min 2 Hz 3 mm s Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset Gain Filter time constant Analog Input Adjustment for C1 Offset 100 0 to 100 0 Change when running Default setting Torque vector control Gain 0 00 to 200 00 Filter time constant 0 000 to 5 000 Analog Input Adjustment for v2 Offset 100 0 to 100 0 0 1 Gain 0 00 to 200 00 Filter tim
263. rnal resistors is compared with the preset detection level voltage H27 pcc DC 10V Resistor Operation level 27 kQ Comparator External alarm PTC thermistor Rp 2 89 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA H30 Communications Link Operation H30 specifies the sources of a speed command and run command inverter itself and computers or PLCs via the RS485 communications link or the CAN communications link and setting means of speed command and run command Inverter Te i Command Link function selection selection Cj vs s e PAN d Loader link function B selection eae Terminal LE unassigned Terminal LE ON J gt Command sources selectable Command sources Description Inverter itself Command sources except RS485 communications link and CAN communications link Speed command Source specified by F01 e g multistep speed command Run command Via the keypad or digital input terminals RS485 communications link port 1 Via the standard RJ 45 port used for connecting keypad RS485 communications link port 2 Via the terminals DX and DX on the terminal blocks CAN communications link Via CAN communications link 2 90 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Command sources specified by H30 Definition of Setting Value for H30 0 inverter itself 0 di 1 RS 485 port 1 2 RS 485
264. rque start mode In this mode the inverter increases the output voltage to generate torque along the slope specified by the time F24 in the rotation direction specified by a run command When the detected speed exceeds the starting speed F23 the inverter starts the speed control to accelerate smoothly When F23 0 00 this mode is disabled Note In the torque start mode a PG error may occur or the DSAG command on the general purpose output terminal may go OFF depending upon the starting speed setting Refere nce Spee d Starting 1 Speed 0 Detection Speed A Starting Speed 0 gt MN sst EENEEEEEEEEEEEEEEN Output Gate NNNEEEEEEEEEEE NEEEEEEEEENEEEEEEEEENI Reference Tourge Reference Toruge T So a A L85 H64 F24 X Av _ 100 s At H65 Bl Incase of Torque Vector control 1 When a multistep speed command with S curve acceleration deceleration is enabled F01 0 If the reference speed pre ramp exceeds the starting speed the inverter activates the DC braking operation After the DC braking operation the inverter activates a soft start to the starting speed After starting speed holding time F24 elapses the inverter accelerates up to the reference speed pre ramp High speed L24 Speed S curve Setting6 High speed E12 Acceleration Deceleration Time5 Starting L19 speed S curve Setting1 0 FWD SS EE EEEEEEEENEEENEEENEN SS EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEENI Ssa
265. rrier frequency automatically Bit 0 Even if the inverter is in heat sink overheating or overload state due to an excessive load abnormal ambient temperature or trouble in the cooling system with this function enabled the inverter lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping OH1 OH3 or OLU Note that if this feature is enabled the motor noise increases If an overload state kept for a long time transcends the inverter capacity the inverter trips E Detect input phase loss Lin Bit 1 Upon detecting an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit because of phase loss or inter phase imbalance in the 3 phase power supplied to the inverter this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm Lin Note In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected a phase loss or an inter phase imbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit E Detect output phase loss OPL Bit 2 This function can detect the output phase loss This function becomes effective by H98 bit2 1 OPL 1s displayed when the loss is detected and the inverter stops Output phase loss detection 1s operated before starting the operation Fix the motor with the brake while output phase loss detection 1s operated When the output phase is lost the inverter becomes alarm with OPL OPL is not a recoverable alarm of the auto resetting function
266. rter Cumulative Run Time of Motor H94 displays the cumulative run time of the motor This feature 1s useful for management and maintenance of the mechanical system With this function code H94 you can set the cumulative run time of the motor to any value you choose For example by specifying 0 you can clear the cumulative run time of the motor Data setting range 0 to 65535 Brakes monitor according to UCM Clear bbE Alarm Brakes monitor according to UCM Check brake control select In case of electrical traction lifts one possible way to fulfill requirements of Unentended Car Movement UCM of the standard EN 81 1 1998 A3 2009 is to use the two motor brakes certified according to this standard and additionally monitor their status individually by using one limit switch for each brake that detects the actual brake status released or applied If the detected brake status is not correct the operation of the elevator must be prevented It is applicable as well to the lift standards EN 81 20 2014 and EN81 50 2014 This function is not active in factory default settings It means that this function has to be activated The parameter used to activate this function is H96 The functionality of H96 is explained below On the other hand if Rescue operation by external brake control is active input function programed with the value 114 RBRK brake monitoring function is disabled even H96 1 This allows end user to perform a rescue ope
267. s indication Maintenance Maintenance information indication Alarm information indication Pat Alarm information SED na PR oN co bI Data copy Data copy function Terminal V2 function selection C1 function V2 function Specifies whether terminal V2 is used with current input 4 to 20 mA or voltage input 0 to 10 V In addition switch SW4 on the interface board must be switched E59 data Input form Switch SW4 0 Current input 0 to 20 mA C1 function Cl 1 Voltage input 0 to 10 V V2 function V2 For details about SW4 refer to Instruction manual ANWARNING Failure to correctly switch as shown above may cause a wrong analog input value possibly leading to unexpected operation of the inverter Injuries may occur Failure may occur 2 71 c c Z O a O z Q O i m 02 Analog Input for 12 Extension function selection C31 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Offset C32 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Gain C33 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Filter time constant Analog Input for V2 C1 function Extension function selection C36 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 Offset C37 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 Gain C38 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 Filter time constant Analog Input for V2 V2 function Extension function selection C41 Analog Input Adjustment for V2 Offset C42 Analog Input Adjustment
268. s it Just as the torque bias function this compensation function lightens an impact made when the brake is released even in elevator systems having no load sensors The table below lists function codes to be used in unbalanced load compensation Function code Name Setting required E01 to E08 E98 and E99 Command assignment to terminals X1 to X8 Setting 67 assigns UNBL c nbalanced load compensation Activation timer ell res nbalanced load compensation ASR P constant Turn the UNBL ON to start estimating an unbalanced load and start L66 and L67 timers If no UNBL is assigned turn a run command ON to start estimating an unbalanced load Specify the maximum time length for estimating an unbalanced load Specify the ASR P constant to use in unbalanced load calculation If vibration occurs decrease the constant C nbalanced load compensation ASR I constant AN Specify the ASR I constant to use in unbalanced load calculation If vibration occurs increase the constant g nbalance load compensation APR P constant Specify the APR P constant to use in unbalanced load calculation ci nbalance load compensation APR D constant A Specify the APR D constant to use in unbalanced load calculation ci nbalance load compensation Filter Time Constant for Detected Speed Specify the Filter time constant for detected speed to use in unbalanced
269. s the ON duration of the cooling fan To prolong the life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running the cooling fan stops when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level Setting the H06 data to 0 0 automatically turns the cooling fan ON OFF depending upon the temperature even when the inverter is running The cooling fan does not restart for 10 seconds after stopping Data setting range 0 0 Auto ON OFF depending upon temperature 0 5 to 10 0 min 999 Disable Always ON Tip The cooling fan state can be monitored via a digital output terminal to which the FAN is assigned by setting 25 PTC NTC Thermistor Mode PTC NTC Thermistor Level These function codes protect the motor from overheating or output an alarm signal using the PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor or NTC Negative Temperature Coefficient thermistor embedded in the motor E PTC thermistor Mode H26 Selects the function operation mode protection or alarm for the PTC thermistor as shown below Data for H26 Action Disable Enable When the voltage sensed by the PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level the motor protective function alarm OH4 is triggered causing the inverter to enter an alarm stop state Enable When the voltage sensed by the PTC thermistor exceeds the detection level a motor alarm signal is output but the inverter continues running You need to assign the motor o
270. scriptions of function codes L99 bit2 E Output MC confirmation CS MC Function code data 103 The correct operation of the output functions SW52 2 and SW52 3 can be confirmed by this function For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L84 to L86 E CAN Enable CAN LE Function code data 108 When CAN LE is turned on the CAN communication becomes effective E Check brake control 1 BRKE1 Function code data 111 Check brake control 2 BRKE2 Function code data 112 These terminal commands are used to check whether the motor brakes are working as expected or not Motor brakes are expected to work like BRKS output from the inverter Monitoring function is according to Unentened Car Movement of EN81 1 1998 A3 2009 9 11 3 Use certified motor brakes microswitches to turn these commands ON or OFF when brakes are released or applied respectibelly For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L80 to L84 Brake Control and H96 For additional information refer to related Application Note AN Lift2 0002v100EN 2 53 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA E Enable rescue operation by means of brake control RBRK Function code data 114 When this function is programed to any of the digital inputs and it becomes ON behavior of the output function BRKS changes BRKS function is not dependant anymore of RUN command For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L117 to L119 BB S
271. sed Speed High speed Door open starting speed Creep speed Zero speed EN FWD SS1 SS2 SS4 DOPEN 2 175 ii When L99 bit6 is 1 After the timer of L89 DOPEN is turned off it is not related to the state of EN terminal and BX terminal When the terminal BX is turned on DOPEN output signal operates as same as EN is turned OFF Speed Highspeed ga Door open s starting speed n co 00 RUE PUNIRI I C GO Ie ce qe nm qe nr Um T zi Greap speed ee kp eset nm ER EE TIT INNER Zero speed FWD ON 2 1 DOPEN i 2 176 L108 2 3 Overview of Function Code Encoder Rotation Detection speed L108 specifies the detection threshold speed for rotating direction according to detected speed from the encoder Data setting range 0 00 to 500 0 mm s Refer to the explanation of FRUN and RRUN L109 L110 L111 L112 L113 L114 L115 Travel direction counter Password setting Travel direction counter Password unlock Travel direction counter Travel limit Travel direction counter Warning level Travel direction counter Partial number of direction changes Travel direction counter Total number of direction changes Travel direction counter Total number of resets Travel direction counter function TDC provides the information for the maintenance of suspension
272. ses lift speed is below motor s rated speed In this case please adjust F03 to lift speed otherwise acceleration deceleration ramps default value might be not confortable enough A WARNING The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the settings carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur Note Some function codes may be modified by changing maximum speed Refer to section 2 2 2 34 2 3 Overview of Function Code Base Speed z deyo Rated Voltage F04 and F05 specify the base speed and voltage of the motor that the inverter drives E Base speed F04 Set the rated speed of the motor In the case of an induction motor please set the synchronous speed of the motor If the speed command units are r min Speed Command Unit function C21 equals 0 the value of F04 can be obtained from the following expression 120 x f Hz g P01 SHd09 NOILONNA Where f is the rated frequency of the motor in Hz LL Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 B Rated voltage F05 Set the rated voltage printed on the motor s nameplate Note that the inverter cannot output the voltage exceeding the inverter s input voltage Data setting range 80 to 240 V 200V series 160 to 500 V 400V series F07 F08 Acceleration Deceleration Time 1 2 E10 to E17 Acceleration De
273. shorter than the one specified by F12 since it takes into account the time period from when the output current exceeds the rated current 100 until it reaches 150 of the overload detection level Example of Operating Characteristics 1 1 1 a l E gt 5 L i E 5 c E D E Ez a 10 5 0 5 0 50 100 150 200 Actual output current Overload detection level x 100 2 37 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA DC Braking Starting Speed DC Braking Operation Level DC Braking Operation Time H64 Zero speed holding time The starting speed the operation level and the operation time of the DC braking are set The DC braking doesn t operate when using it by the vector control with PG B DC Braking Starting Speed F20 The starting speed of the DC braking when decelerating to stop is set LL Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 E DC Braking Operation Level F21 Output current that DC braking operates is set This level is used at start during H64 and at stop during F22 Data setting range 0 to 100 E DC Braking Operation Time F22 The operation time of the DC braking is set This timer will start to count only when decelerating to stop in other words when decelerating F20 speed level is reached The stop speed operation is carried out when set to 0 00 s Data setting range 0 00 to 30 00 s Timing diag
274. side the block diagrams and their meanings with some examples Table 1 1 Symbols and Meanings Symbol Meaning Input output signals to from a 1 the inverter s control i terminal block Symbol Meaning Function code Control commands assigned to the control terminal block input signals FWD REV etc Low pass filter Features appropriate characteristics by changing the time constant through the function code data J e N Switch controlled by a function code Numbers assigned to the terminals express the function code data Internal control command for inverter logic High limiter Limits the upper value by a constant or data set to a function code Reference Speed I Switch controlled by an Coi nicatins external control command Link In the example shown on the left the enable communications link command LE assigned to one of the digital input terminals from X1 to X5 controls the switch Low limiter Limits the lower value by a constant or data set to a function code OR logic In normal logic 1f any input is ON then C ON Only if all inputs are OFF then C OFF from dropping to a negative 0 value NOR Not OR logic In normal logic if any input is OFF then C ON If all inputs are ON C OFF Gain multiplier for reference frequencies given by current and or voltage input or for analog output signals C AxB AND log
275. soon as RBRK input function is activated brake opens Motor reaches a certain speed which is over L117 speed limit At this point BRKS signal goes to OFF Inverter waits L118 time to set BRKS to ON again RBRK signal is removed by the controller when floor level is reached 2 180 2 3 Overview of Function Code Motor Speed mm s L117 L108 0 EN1 amp EN2 RUN command FWD or REV RBRK BRKS L118 L118 L118 Figure 2 Timing diagram when L117 speed level is reached Figure 3 shows a case where inverter is locked by rbA alarm As soon as rescue operation by brake control starts because speed doesn t reach level set on parameter L108 and time set on L119 elapses inverter trips rbA alarm When inverter trips an alarm BRKS output function goes to OFF immediately Motor Speed mm s 4 Sf al E eee EN1 amp EN2 RUN command FWD or REV Sym 3 0 L119 Figure 3 Inverter locked by rbA case 1 Figure 4 shows a second case where inverter is locked by rbA alarm As soon as rescue operation by brake control starts motor speed increases because lift car moves by gravity Therefore speed reaches a value over L108 speed limit Suddenly motor speed decreases to 0 00 mm s for example because lift car is locked for any mechanical reason At this point because speed is below level set on function code L108 L119 timer starts to count When L119 time is elapsed inverter trips
276. speed L29 and L30 specify a short floor operation that applies when a deceleration command is entered during acceleration in a multistep speed operation in order to keep the current high speed operation and shorten the creep time The short floor operation can be also used for resetting elevators There are two kinds of short Floor operation Model Normal Short Floor Operation and Mode2 Short Floor Operation with location control The explanation of Model is as follows LL Refer to the description of function code L99 for the method of changing short floor operation and the explanation of Mode2 E Short floor operation holding time L29 L29 specifies the holding time of A short floor operation The count of the holding time starts when the speed becomes constant Data setting range OFF 0 00 to 10 00 s E Allowable speed L30 L30 specifies the allowable speed below which a short floor operation can be activated When the motor is running at the speed less than the one specified by L20 during acceleration in a multistep speed operation entering a deceleration command activates a short floor operation Data setting range 0 00 to 6000 r min LL Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 2 140 2 3 Overview of Function Code In case of Reference speed final lt Allowable speed L30 when a deceleration command is entered 1 Upon receipt o
277. t returns to normal state from stand by mode above No 1000 are logical inversion signals active OFF except the followings THR 1009 active ON 9 active OFF DRS 1066 active ON 66 active OFF THR2 110l active ON 101 active OFF Tip 2 54 2 3 Overview of Function Code E10 to E17 Acceleration Deceleration Time 3 to 10 F07 and F08 Acceleration Deceleration Time 1 and 2 E10 to E17 specify the acceleration or deceleration time in linear acceleration deceleration zones excluding S curve zones LL For details refer to the descriptions of function codes F07 to F08 Acceleration Deceleration Time 1 2 Run Command Multistep Speed Command Agreement Timer Mode Run Command Multistep Speed Command Agreement Timer Time E18 and E19 set the run command multistep speed command agreement timer to avoid signals chattering problems E Mode E18 E18 specifies applicable commands for the agreement timer Data for E18 Applicable commands FWD REV SSI SS2 SS4 SS8 Bi Time E19 E19 specifies the period to confirm whether the terminal command FWD REV or SS1 SS2 SS4 SS 6 is kept ON or OFF after the command is switched ON or OFF If the command is kept ON during time specified in E19 the inverter recognizes the Data setting range 0 000 to 0 100 s Application of the agreement timer Confirmation for run command Less than the period specified by E19 comman
278. t signals for all the customizable logics from step 1 to 200 to maintain synchronism 2 Perform logical operations sequentially from step 1 to 200 3 If an output of a step is an input to the next step outputs of step with high priority can be used in the same process 4 The customizable logic simultaneously updates 10 output signals 2 to 20 ms cycle Input signal Logical operation Simultaneous Input signal latch Step 1 2 3 200 paate latch Note that if you do not consider the process order of customizable logic when configuring a function block the expected output may not be obtained the operation can be slower or a hazard signal can occur because the output signal of a step is not available until the next cycle ACAUTION Changing a functional code related to the customizable logic U code etc or turning ON the customizable logic cancel signal CLC causes change in operation sequence depending on the setting which may suddenly start an operation or start an unexpected action Fully ensure it is safe before performing the operation An accident or physical injury may occur B Customizable logic timer monitor Step selection U91 X89 to X93 The monitor function codes can be used to monitor the I O status or timer s operation state in the customized logics Selection of monitor timer Function code Function Remarks U91 0 Monitor not active the monitor data is 0 The s
279. t temperature of the heat sink inside the inverter 3 23 o 9 m S d o Z c eui Z 3 Y x r z N Category RS 485 error Details Shows the cumulative number of times an error has arisen at S Chl RS 485 communications port 1 and the code for the most recent Communications port 1 error Shows the cumulative number of times an error has arisen at RS 485 error IUE mA Ch2 RS 485 communications port 2 and the code for the most recent Communications port 2 error Shows the cumulative number of times an error has arisen in Option error A port OpA option communications when loading the option A port and the code for the most recent error Option error B port OpB Not supported Shows the cumulative number of times an error has arisen in Option error C port OpC option communications when loading the option C port and the code for the most recent error Shows the cumulative number of times a transmitting error has SD Er ME NN arisen at CAN communication CAN communication error Shows the cumulative number of times a receiving error has arisen RD Er Den at CAN communication Inverter Shows the inverter ROM version as four digits Main ROM version Keypad Shows the keypad ROM version as four digits KP ROM version Option A port Shows the option A port ROM version as four digits OpA ROM version Option B port OpB Not supported ROM version P O
280. ta length selection y05 y15 Sets the character length y05 and y15 data Function 0 For inverter supporting loader via RS 485 8 bits The value does not need to be set since it 1 7 bits automatically becomes 8 bits It also applies to Modbus RTU E Parity selection y06 y16 Sets the parity y06 and y16 data Function No parity bit For inverter supporting loader via 2 bits of stop bit for Modbus RTU RS 485 The value does not need Even pari to be set since it automatically 1 bitof put bit for Modbus RTU becomes even parity Odd parity 1 bit of stop bit for Modbus RTU No parity bit 1 bits of stop bit for Modbus RTU 2 130 2 3 Overview of Function Code E Stop bit selection y07 y17 Sets the stop bit Su 2 bits For inverter supporting loader via RS 485 The value does not need to be set since it i l bit automatically becomes 1 bit For Modbus RTU The value does not need to be set since it is automatically determined in conjunction with the parity bit function y06 y16 E Communication time out detection timer y08 y18 Sets a period from the time when the system detects y08 and x data communication time out for any reason such as Disconnection 1s not disconnection in equipment that periodically access detected to the station within a specific time during the Detection time from 1 to operation using the RS 485 communication until 60 s the
281. ta protection disabled F00 0001 Data protection enabled F00 z H99 Password protection enabled F00 H99 Password protection temporarily disabled Y N y N Y Y N y Y 2 H99 0000 Y N Y Y Y 1 Using a communications link can change or initialize function code data even if the data protection is enabled However it cannot if the password protection is enabled 2 Even if the password protection is enabled using H03 can initialize all function code data including password to the factory defaults This is useful when the user forgot his her password Note Neither F00 data nor H99 data can be changed via a communications link 2 24 2 3 Overview of Function Code Speed Command F07 F08 Acceleration Deceleration Time 1 2 E10 to E17 Acceleration Deceleration Time 3 to 10 E61 to E63 Analog Input for 12 and V2 C04 to C19 Multistep Speed C22 Analog Input Type L11 to L18 Multistep Speed Command Combination L19 to L28 and H57 to H60 S curve Setting 1 to 14 L29 Short Floor Operation F01 selects the source that specifies a motor speed Data for F01 Function Enable multistep speed command with S curve acceleration deceleration Enable analog speed command Setting 1 or 2 enables analog input voltage input to terminals 12 and V2 V2 function and current input to terminal V2 C1 function Not reversible Reversible
282. tails refer to function code F25 2 93 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Main power shutdown detection Mode selection This function monitors the AC input power supply of the inverter to see if the AC input power supply main circuit power 1s established and prevents inverter operation when the main circuit power is not established Disables main circuit power cutoff detection Enables main circuit power cutoff detection With power supply via a PWM converter or DC link bus there is no AC input When the data for H72 is 1 the inverter cannot operate Change the data for H72 to 0 Note For single phase supply consult your Fuji Electric representatives Speed Agreement Hysteresis Speed Agreement OFF delay time The DSAG signal can be assigned to a general purpose programmable output terminal by setting ap The DSAG comes ON regardless of the status of a run command when the difference between the commanded and detected speeds is within the hysteresis band specified by H74 The ON to OFF delay circuit is available for chattering prevention If the difference 1s larger than the allowable band specified by H74 continuously for the time specified by H75 then the DSAG signal goes OFF No OFF to ON delay function is available Data setting range H74 0 00 to 6000 r min Data setting range H75 0 00 to 1 00 s LL Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc
283. te eee dd 3 6 3 3 1 Monitoring the running Status eee Rd Ah Ro EDU REI RUIN AAA 3 6 3 3 2 Remote and Local Modesa rocni x ineo een He dee He en idan EE Ie inertness 3 7 3 3 3 Setting up reference speed pre ramp sssssssesesesseeeen eene nennen enne ener nnns 3 7 3 34 Running stopping the motot eie er tee eee eiie Pete cde 3 8 34 Programming Modes eee nete a edere deese eiecit at Ver eene tede dori edenda 3 9 DAM Quick Setup oie ats Laas PRO tes ptu uis etaient nisu istius ce tepida 3 11 LU DEI m 3 11 3 453 E ncti n Codes nee se ES t e e Aet tote nte 3 13 3 44 Inverter Information INV Trifo L4 esses vecino a ie ste ied ve Ed 3 19 3 4 5 Alarm Information Alarm Info neret enne tne enne nennen nennen 3 26 3 4 6 User Configuration User Config cccccccccesscsescssssesceesceeeesecaecaecsaecseecaeesaeseaeeeeeseeeeerenesnseeerenetens 3 28 SALT 1001833 oot rasa een Nena tl ahd ees nocere A Or ea vo mies a scis 3 29 35 Alam Modes onere De hee e er Gece eee e a e e e ERE e en 3 30 3 5 1 Releasing the alarm and switching to Running mode sse 3 30 3 5 2 Displaying the alarm history csse iisdem ee eese E eiie desee ded 3 30 3 5 3 Displaying the status of inverter at the time of alarm 3 30 Chapter 1 BLOCK DIAGRAMS FOR CONTROL LOGIC This chapter describes the main block diagrams for the control logic of the FRENIC Lift LM
284. ted by arrival point and moving distance Practical starting point of E12 Acceleration ERA S creepless operation deceleration time 5 E13 Acceleration deceleration time 6 L19 S curve setting 1 Xx L28 S curve setting 10 Zero speed Zero speed High speed Ts aro spee ign spos Zone A Zero speed command command command FWD SN ee ON Maximum speed E Acceleration time Creepless operation Acceleration gt a Maximum speed o O S p Deceleration time rem um Jerk l 1 Example of Creepless Operation with CRPLS 2 146 2 3 Overview of Function Code The graph below shows a creepless operation applied when no CRPLS is assigned Both the creep speed C07 and zero speed C04 are 0 00 r min To prevent any impact to the load when the speed changes to zero speed from any other speed the speed control should be programmed so that the acceleration deceleration time and S curve zone will not change Speed L24 S curve L25 S curve setting 6 setting 7 High speed arcu a ia Theoretical starting point of creepless operation Calculated by arrival point and movin distance Practical starting point of c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 E12 Acceleration creepless operation deceleration timer 5 E13 Acceleration deceleration time 6 lt
285. teresis width If the differential value is bigger than threshold value hysteresis width this function outputs logical 1 True On the other hand If the value is smaller than threshold value hysteresis width the function outputs logical 0 False Threshold value Hysteres is width Comparator Comparison function with hysteresis This function compares the absolute differential value between input 1 and input 2 with the threshold value specified with the 1st function code The 2nd function code provides hysteresis width This function works like as comparator 1 Threshold value Hysteres is width 2055 Comparator 4 Comparator gt Comparison function with hysteresis This function compares the absolute differential value between input and input 2 with the threshold value specified with the 1st function code The 2nd function code provides hysteresis width This function works like as comparator 2 Comparison function with hysteresis Input 1 is the input value of this function and input 2 is not used The 1st function code provides threshold value and the 2nd one provides hysteresis width If input 1 is threshold value or bigger this function outputs logical 1 True On the other hand If input 1 is smaller than threshold value Tou width this function outputs logical 0 False Threshold value Threshold value Hysteres is width Hysteres is wid
286. th 2 114 Block selection etc Function block Comparator 6 2 3 Overview of Function Code Function Description 1 U04 etc Threshold Input 1 1s the input value of this function and value input 2 is not used The 1st function code provides threshold value and the 2nd one provides hysteresis width If input 1 is threshold vane or smaller this function outputs logical 1 True On the other hand If input 1 is bigger than threshold value ee width this function outputs logical 0 False Function 2 U05 etc Hysteres is width Window comparator 1 Comparison function with limits Upper Whether the value of the input is within a threshold preselected range specified with two function codes determines the status of the output Input is the input value of this function and input 2 is not used The Ist function code provides upper threshold value and the 2nd one provides lower threshold value If input 1 is within the range defined with two function codes this function outputs logical 1 True On the other hand If input 1 is outside of m range this function outputs logical 0 False Lower threshold Window comparator 2 Comparison function with limit Up er This function has the inverting logic of Window threshold comparator 1 Lower threshold High selector High selector function Upper This function receives two inputs input 1 and l
287. thin y35 secons continue operation y35 seconds exceeded error 2 133 z deyo S3QdO09 NOILONNA H Compatibility selection y37 Specifies CANopen behaviour as keeping compatibility with FRENIC Lift LM1 To change the y37 data it is necessary to press the 6 C31 keys simultaneous keying It will be applied after restarting CAN communication Behaviour y37 0 Standard y37 1 Compatible with LM1 Device type 0x1000 responses 0001 0192 hex 0000 0000 hex Available PDOs PDOI PDO2 andPDO3 Only PDOI PDO3 is configurable PDOI is configurable Function code settings for PDO ex S01 0201 hex ex S01 0202 hex Setting method of speed command by communication Specifies to use either speed command or acceleration command via RS 485 or CANopen communication ZET 1 Acceleration command S16 S17 y95 Communication data storage selection If any of the communication error alarms Er8 ErP Ert occurs in RS 485 or CANopen communication the data of communication command function codes S codes can automatically be cleared Since the frequency and operation commands are also disabled when the data is cleared the inverter does not start unintentionally when an alarm is released EE en a communication error alarm occurs the data 1s not cleared compatible with the conventional mode When a communication error alarm occurs the function cod
288. tialize PRG gt 2 gt 5 This returns function code data to the values in the factory default settings or sets function code data for certain application system Changing the data requires double key operation the 6 amp 9 key and the S key or the 693 key and the amp key The following types of initialization are available Table 3 10 Initialization types Initialization type Function Manually set values Does not initialize Initialize values to factory default values Initialize all function code data to settings suited for vector vector control for IM control for IM initializes to factory default values System specific initialization Initialize all function code data to settings suited for vector vector control for PMSM control for PMSM System specific initialization Initialize all function code data to settings suited for open open loop control for IM loop control for IM Limited initialization Initialize function codes except communication settings initialization except for communication function codes Limited initialization Initialize function codes for customizable logic U U1 codes initialization for customizable logic 3 4 4 Inverter Information INV Info PRG gt 3 Menu number 3 INV Info allows display of various information of the inverter Current operation status i o status and maintenance data Travel direction counter function is also provided in t
289. tion When the battery operation speed does not reach the door open starting speed L87 the DOPEN will be kept OFF Note When the L87 0 00 the DOPEN does not work Operation is different according to L99 bit6 Refer to the descriptions of function codes L99 bit6 for details 2 166 2 3 Overview of Function Code L90 PG abnormal operation choice H76 PG abnormal mode 3 detection range H77 PG abnormal mode 3 detection timer L91 PG Error Detection Detection level z deyo L92 PG Error Detection Detection time L90 to L92 specify the PG error detection conditions and the inverter operation against the error If the speed is within a PG error domain specified by L91 during the detection time specified by L92 the inverter regards it as an error and runs or stops with without an alarm according to the mode specified by L90 Data setting range L91 0 to 50 L92 0 0 to 10 0 s 3002 NOILONNA Detected speed Detected speed L91 Detection L91 level L91 Detection L91 level Reference speed final Detection Level H76 Detection Reference speed Level H76 final L90 0 1 2 L90 3 Figure 1 Figure 2 In the above figure D through represent the following states DO The phases A and B of the PG are reversely connected Excessive speed deviation Detected speed gt Reference speed final Q9 PG wires broken During zero speed operation that is at 0 1 to 0 1
290. tion 1 WO DB Mas sa Sc C x x _ Equation 2 2 Nmax 100 VN max 60 Where Vmax Elevator speed L31 mm s Nmax Motor s rated speed F03 r min N Motor speed at the start of deceleration r min Tdec Deceleration period specified s Sc Sd S curve zone specified ERE Maximum speed Speed r min 9 Deceleration Sb rig y x Sc acc Tdec 4 Stop Sd Sa 0 k Time t s p Start The elevator cage moves by distance L calculated by equations 1 and 2 when the elevator decelerates from speed N during deceleration period Tdec within S curve zone from Sc to Sd provided that no speed error exists in inverter control The deceleration point therefore should be distance L or more before the stop position Conditions required for starting a creepless operation When all of the following three conditions are met a creepless operation starts 1 A creepless operation command is entered That is The CRPLS command is turned ON when the CRPLS is assigned to a terminal Any speed command except zero speed is modified to zero speed when the CRPLS is not assigned to any terminal 2 The reference speed pre ramp is 0 00 r min 3 The remaining moving distance the internally calculated moving distance from the start of a creepless operation is nonzero 2 145 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA Restrictions on creepless operation 1 2 3
291. tion offset tuning DTUNE Function code data 107 DTUNE is turned ON while Magnetic pole position offset tuning is operating The end of the magnetic pole position tuning done by PPT can be confirmed E Recommended running direction at battery operation RRD Function code data 109 The inverter recommends the direction that should operate during the battery operation by using digital outputs RRD In other words it recommends always the braking direction If RRD is ON it means that inverter recomends rescue in FWD direction On the other hand if RRD is OF it means that inverter recomends rescue in REV direction These signals are saved when the power supply to the inverter is shut off and kept until the next operation begins They are kept as well under battery operation E Drive continuance alarm ALM2 Function code data 110 When some special alarm happens the inverter keeps driving the motor for ten seconds At the same time drive continuance alarm comes ON Moreover the drive continuance alarm keeps the same condition without resetting For details refer to the descriptions of function codes L98 bit E Shutdown confirmation SD Function code data 111 Shutdown confirmation comes ON when the output current of the inverter equals the 3 of the inverter rated current by satisfying following condition Terminal EN1 EN2 OFF BX ON 3 of the inverter rated current Detected output current
292. tions link via RS485 or CAN LE Function code data 24 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor according to the frequency commands or run commands received via the communications link selected with function code H30 RS485 CAN or DCP No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON For details refer to the description of function code H30 Communications Link Operation E Universal DI U DI Function code data 25 Using U DI enables the inverter to monitor digital signals sent from the peripheral equipment via an RS485 or CAN communications link by feeding those signals to the digital input terminals Signals assigned to the universal DI are simply monitored and do not operate the inverter For an access to universal DI via the RS485 or CAN communications link refer to their respective Instruction Manuals E Enable PG vector control PG Hz Function code data 7 27 Turning this terminal command OFF cancels the PG vector control and switches to the V f control The ON OFF switching when the inverter is in operation will not be validated it will be after the inverter stops Whenever this terminal command is not assigned the PG vector control is effective by default E Torque Bias 1 and 2 TB1 and TB2 Function code data 60 and 61 Selecting TBI or TB2 allows you to set digital torque bias For details refer to the description of function code L54 Torque Bias Mode E Hold torque bias
293. tiplier Multiplication function with two inputs input 1 and input 2 This function has output limiters upper lower specified with two function codes The 1st function code provides upper limit value and the 2nd one provides lower limit value Divider Division function with two inputs input 1 and input 2 Input 1 is dividend and input 2 is divisor This function has output limiters upper lower specified with two function ade The 1st function code provides upper limit value and the 2nd one provides lower limit value Limiter Upper and lower limit functions of single input input 1 The 1st function code provides upper limit value and the 2nd one provides lower limit value Absolute value function of single input input 1 Negative input numbers become positive This function has output limiters upper lower specified with two function codes The 1st function code provides upper limit value and the 2nd one provides lower limit value 2 113 Block selection etc Function block Inverting adder Description Inverting addition function with single input input 1 This function subtracts the input 1 to the value specified with the 1st function code inverts the result And furthermore the function adds the result to the value specified with the 2nd function code and outputs the result Function U04 etc Subtractio n value former Function 2 U05 etc Addition value la
294. tomize logic operation and if the PC loader is read or copy to the touch panel is performed the temporary changed data not the non volatile memory data may be copied Stop the customize logic before these operations 2 121 4001 Hold 4002 Inverting adder with enable 4003 Selector 1 U04 Input 1 o Output Input 1 op Output input 1 055 Output Ras 4 U05 N E otal ie U04 o n UOA 1 Input 2 Input 2 U05 dnput 2 4004 Selector 2 4005 Low pass filter with enable 4006 Rate limiter with enable Input 1 UO4 eis Output Input 1 Input 1 1 T eO uos a Output limiter HO input 2 Input 2 40 U04 5000 Selector 3 Input 1 70 Output Input 2 U04 S015 6001 Reading function codes 5100 Selector 4 Input 1 0 r Output U04 0 3 S015 Input 2 6002 Writing function codes Input 1 U04 U05 Output U121 READ Input 2 Input 1 U04 U05 Output U171 Input 2 6003 Temporary change of function code U04 U05 Function code Input 1 3 Input 2 2 122 2 3 Overview of Function Code B Output signal Digital analog In the customizable logic outputs from steps 1 to 10 are
295. tor temperature H27 Level 0 00 to 5 00 H30 Communications Link Each digit of hexadecimal number specifies the source of following commands H30 o U OO T Speed command Run command Torque bias command 0 F01 Terminal L54 1 RS 485 Ch 1 2 RS 485 Ch 2 3 CAN 4 F same as 0 Additionally following alternative settings are also available for compatibility with FRENIC Lift LM1 0x0005 Equivalent with 0x0030 0x0006 Equivalent with 0x0033 0x000E Equivalent with 0x0333 H42 Capacitance of DC Link Bus Meas 0 Initial value measurement Capacitor Failed 1 Measurement failure 2 to 65535 Indication for teplacind DC link bus capacior H43 H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Link 0 to 65535 Indication for replacing DC link bus capacitor Bus Capacitor H48 Cumulative Run Time of 0 to 9999 Indication for replacing capacitors on printed circuit Capacitors on Printed Circuit boards Board H54 i BERA H55 Deceleration Time 0 00 to 99 9 Variable 80 12 MEN NNNM A A H56 Deceleration Time 0 00 to 99 9 Variable e H57 en 50 of max speed He 2 10 2 4 Function Code Tables Change Default Software Code Name Data setting range Increment Unit when settin vector version which running g 3 control can be used 5 H64 Zero Speed Holding Time H65 Starting Speed Soft start time H66 0 Use detected speed z deyo Detection method 1 Use reference speed final H67 Holding time H72 Main pow
296. tter Variable limiter Variable limit function of single input input 1 Input 1 provides upper limit value and input 2 provides lower limit value Ste number Not required Linear function Linear function of single input input 1 This function receives single input input 1 calculates pre defined first order polynomial and outputs the result The 1st and 2nd function codes provide the coefficients of the polynomial The polynomial is represented by the following formula y K xy Kg The output is limited within the range between 9990 and 9990 by the internal limiter Factor KA 9990 0 to 9990 0 Factor KB 9990 0 to 9990 0 Comparator 1 Comparison function with hysteresis This function compares the differential value between input 1 and input 2 with the threshold value specified with the 1st function code The 2nd function code provides hysteresis width If the differential value is threshold value hysteresis width or bigger this function outputs logical 1 True On the other hand if the the differential value is threshold value hysteresis Nm or smaller this function outputs logical 0 False Threshold value Hysteres is width Comparator 2 Comparison function with hysteresis This function compares the differential value between input 1 and input 2 with the threshold value specified with the 1st function code The 2nd function code provides hys
297. unctionally equivalent to the operation with L52 0 4 Soft start to the starting speed is disabled Once the inverter speed decreases to less than the stop speed increasing the reference speed pre ramp with a run command being ON does not activate a soft start to the starting speed To soft start the motor up to the starting speed turn the run command OFF once E Incase of Vector control with PG Speed start mode Setting L52 data to 0 enables the speed start mode 1 When a multistep speed command with S curve acceleration deceleration is enabled F01 0 If the reference speed pre ramp exceeds the starting speed the inverter activates a soft start to the starting speed After starting speed holding time F24 is elapsed the inverter accelerates up to the reference speed pre ramp H64 0 00 s H64 0 00 s L24 L24 Speed S curve setting Speed S curve setting High Speed High Speed Pio Acceleration E12 Acceleration eceleration time 6 deceleration time 6 Stating Speed L19 ES S curve setting Stating Speed L19 0 gt S curve setting gt 0 FWD CN CN CN SWs22 OutputGate WENNENENEEEEEEEELS S FWD SSI SS2 SS4 sws2 2 lt Output Gate ZNNEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEERENE Zero Hes F24 ceo xx gt Speed 7 C04 L85 H64 H65 F24 L85 If stop speed set F25 is higher than starting speed F23 the inverter does not activate a soft start as long as the reference speed pre ramp does not exceed the st
298. ure 5 a feedback problem during normal travel is shown Speed High speed t 5 0 EN1 amp EN2 O 3 Run command i FWD REV l SCCF Short circuit contact TT IGBT sgate s m 0808080 0 Alarm E A ON UN Y _ l L120 82 Inverter trips SCA Figure 5 Feedback problem during normal travel SCA alarm As it can be observed during motion no timer is considered in other words if feedback is lost SCCF input signal inverter trips immediately SCA alarm and output circuit is switched OFF This is in order to fast avoid any possible damage on the inverter s output circuit In case that L120 1 SCC will turn ON and OFF under certain conditions as it is explained above Figures 6 7 8 and 9 show the sequence in these cases Case 1 Inverter in alarm ALM output function ON Figure 6 shows the case when any alarm except SCA is issued As it can be observed inverter waits anyway the time L86 as soon as IGBT s gates are OFF By means of this delay time short circuit contacts will be closed when brake is applied and no current is flowing 2 185 c Z O a O z Q Og m 02 Speed High speed 0 j EN1 amp EN2 O Run command FWD REV EE SCCF O BRKS D Scc O 000 Short circuit contact O 0 I
299. urs decrease it In case L76 is set to 0 0 LOS setting value is used for ACR P constant in unbalanced load calculation Data setting range 0 0 L05 setting value 0 1 to 10 0 2 159 ch c Z O a O z Q O i m 02 L80 Brake Control Mode L81 Brake Control Operation level L82 Brake Control ON delay time L83 Brake Control OFF delay time L84 Brake Control Brake check time L80 to L84 make settings for brake control signals E Brake control mode L80 L80 specifies the BRKS mode as listed below Data for L80 OFF condition Arun command is ON After detection of the Except AND stop speed the OFF conditions The inverter main circuit output delay period specified given at left gate is kept ON during the ON by L83 has elapsed delay period specified by L82 OR The inverter main circuit output gate is kept ON during the ON delay period specified by L82 2 Arun command is ON The inverter output is AND shut down Output current gt Motor no load current x L81 AND E Operation level L81 L81 specifies the output current that turns the BRKS signal ON when L80 2 Data setting range 0 to 200 Motor no load current reference E ON delay time L82 L82 specifies the delay time from when the BRKS ON conditions are met until the BRKS signal is actually turned ON Data setting range 0 00 to 10 00 s E OFF delay time L83 L83 spec
300. verheat protection THM to one of the digital output terminals beforehand by which a temperature alarm condition can be detected by the thermistor PTC function code data 56 Enable When the voltage sensed by the NTC thermistor exceeds the detection level the motor protective function alarm OH4 is triggered causing the inverter to enter an alarm stop state E PTC thermistor Level H27 Specifies the detection level for the temperature expressed in voltage sensed by PTC thermistor Data setting range 0 00 to 5 00 V The temperature at which the overheating protection is to be activated depends on the characteristics of the PTC thermistor The internal resistance of the thermistor will significantly change at the alarm temperature The detection level voltage is specified based on the change of internal resistance 2 88 2 3 Overview of Function Code PTC thermistor internal resistance A Rp iere Temperature Alarm temperature Suppose that the resistance of PTC thermistor at alarm temperature Rp the detection voltage level V is calculated by the equation below Set the result V to function code H27 Substitute the internal resistance of the PTC thermistor at the alarm temperature with Rp to obtain Vo Rp VY 77000 Rp x10 5 V Connect the PTC thermistor as shown below The voltage that is obtained by dividing the input voltage to the terminal PTC with a set of inte
301. w speed L38 to match the motor and pulse encoder specifications 2 Set function code L03 to 4 When a run command is set tuning starts After tuning the tuning result is written into L04 data After tuning the L03 data will be automatically reset to 0 3 Enter run forward and run reverse commands to run the motor at the low speed at least one rotation in the forward and reverse directions respectively Note 1 4 Turn the power off and then turn it on again to confirm that the motor runs normally Note 2 Note 1 If the motor fails to run normally the A and B phases of the pulse encoder may be mistakenly connected in wiring Once shut down the power and correct the wiring of the A and B phases After parameter tuning of the motor do tuning again with the procedure above Note 2 If the motor fails to run normally the wiring of the magnetic pole position detection signals may be wrong Correct the wiring For details refer to the instruction manual of the corresponding option card L05 ACR P constant L06 ACR I constant When a synchronous motor is used P constant L05 and I constant L06 of ACR Automatic Current Regulator are set Data setting range L05 0 0 to 15 0 Data setting range L06 0 01 to 5 00 ms L07 Automatic pole tuning selection The magnetic pole position tuning operates before it begins to drive when the magnetic pole position has not been adjusted by the power shutdown etc For instan
302. witch 2 33 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA Control type Analog voltage current output Switching Controller Controller W si Circuit V2 Inverter Inverter Speed select 3 speeds 2 speeds z Analog input V2 or C1 or 12 1 Creep Low High See the figure below Speed High speed Low Cree d speed PPRS 0 5 6 1005 nelog input 2 Creep High See the table below Switch Multistep speed OFF Creep speed ON High speed 3 Voltage input V2 or current input C1 can be selected by SW4 on the control PCB 4 When two or more analog inputs are used at the same time analog input is added Rated Speed F03 specifies the Rated maximum speed to limit a reference speed pre ramp Specifying the maximum speed exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Make sure that the maximum speed setting matches the equipment rating 120x1 120 x 200 Data setting range to r min P01 P01 LL Data setting range changes depending on the number of poles of motor etc For details refer to section 2 2 In case of induction motor the recommended value of F03 is the rated speed speed at rated torque not the synchronous speed Make sure with the lift manufacturer which is the lift speed and if it matches with motor s rated speed In some ca
303. y L62 Data setting range 200 to 200 96 with the forward direction torque as Specified by L63 Data setting range 200 to 200 96 with the forward direction torque as 4 0 No torque bias Specified by L64 Data setting range 200 to 200 96 with the forward direction torque as PI torque bias L54 2 Setting L54 data to 2 enables PI torque bias setting with analog input Torque sensor is used for measuring braking torque calculate torque bias by making the output of torque sensor become 0V before releasing brake It is possible to adjust it by the following function codes DCP torque bias L54 3 Setting L54 data to 3 enables torque bias command from DCP protocol communication E Torque Bias P constant L58 Specify the P constant to use in PI torque bias calculation Data setting range 0 01 to 10 00 E Torque Bias I constant L59 Specify the I constant to use in PI torque bias calculation Data setting range 0 00 to 1 00 s 2 153 z deyo 3002 NOILONNA Torque Bias Startup time L55 specifies the startup time of a torque bias Data setting range 0 00 to 1 00 s Terminal command Hold torque bias and startup time Setting 62 to any general purpose programmable input terminal by function codes E01 to E08 E98 and E99 assigns the H TB command Turning the H TB ON holds a reference torque bias turning it OFF releases the hold When a run com
304. ypad When no keypad operation is performed during the time specified by K02 the backlight goes OFF Data setting range 1 to 30 min OFF Data for K02 Function OFF Always turn the backlight OFF Turn the backlight OFF automatically after no keypad operation Rd is performed during the backlight OFF time The backlight OFF time can be configured easily in Programming mode as follows PRG gt 1 Start up gt 3 Disp Setting gt 9 Lighting time LCD monitor Backlight brightness control Contrast control These function codes control the backlight brightness and contrast Data setting range 0 to 10 mBacklight brightness control K03 Data for K03 Data for K04 Dark lt gt Light The backlight brightness and contrast can be controlled easily in Programming mode as follows PRG gt 1 Start up gt 3 Disp Setting gt 10 Brightness PRG gt 1 Start up gt 3 Disp Setting gt 11 LCD Contrast 2 194 2 3 Overview of Function Code LCD Monitor Status Display Hide Selection K08 selects whether to display or hide the status messages to be monitored on the LCD monitor on the keypad Data setting range 0 1 Data for K08 Function Hide status messages EE Display status messages factory default lt LCD on the keypad gt Status messages Capacitor lifetime being measured Undervoltage No input to EN Input to BX During auto

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

INR SI47 1909 E_Lift(LM2)_RM(E)

INR-SI47-1909-E_Lift(LM2)_RM(E)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents